Home

Epson WF-8590 User's Guide

1. Copying option _ Available settings Varying levels Adjusts the lightness or darkness of copies Remove Shadow Of sd Select On to erase the shadows that appear in the center of a document when copying a book or that appear around a document when copying thick paper Remove Punch lof sd Select On to erase the binding holes on a document Collate Copy lof sd Select On to print multiple copies of a multi page document both in order and sorted into sets Mixed Ons Select On to copy originals of varying sizes in their original Dry Time Select to adjust the drying time for 2 sided copies if smudges or marks appear on the front of the paper when engac cl print on the second side Longer si Advanced Various settings Select advanced settings such as Saturation and Settings Sharpness Parent topic Copying 111 Printing from a Computer Before printing from your computer make sure you have set up your product and installed its software as described on the Start Here sheet Note If you have an Internet connection it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software on Epson s support website If you see a Software Update screen select Enable automatic checking and click OK The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software Follow the on screen instructions Printing with Windows Printing with OS X Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Printing with the PostScript
2. a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and 458 c You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and d If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modif
3. on the LCD screen to select the number of copies up to 99 Press the left or right arrow buttons to scroll through and select additional photos or press the 5 back button to return to the thumbnail image view and select another photo e To select all photos select Options gt Select Images gt Select All Images 5 To adjust a photo adjustments modify only your printed copy not the original file select its thumbnail image and select Adjustments Make the necessary adjustments and press the 5 back button 6 Tochange the print settings select Settings and select the necessary settings When you are finished press the 5 back button 7 When you are ready to print press one of the buttons Note To cancel printing press the Stop button Parent topic Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen Related references Photo Adjustment Options Device Mode Print Setting Options Device Mode 307 Printing TIFF and PDF Files You can select and print TIFF or PDF files from a USB flash drive 1 2 3 Press the f home button if necessary Select Memory Device Select TIFF or PDF You see a list of the available files Select the file you want to print You see information about the file Select Proceed Do the following as necessary Toprint more than one copy use the numeric keypad on the control panel or press or on the LCD screen to select the number of copies up to 99 e To change the print setti
4. 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 454 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is no
5. 12 13 14 Select the Size and Orientation settings that match your original To scan both sides of a 2 sided original into one image select a Stitch Images setting Note To use the Stitch Images setting you must select ADF Double sided as the Document Source setting To allow Epson Scan to detect and correct any skew in your original select Correct Document Skew To rotate your original in your scan select a Rotate setting Select the Image Type setting that matches your original Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan Click the Preview button Epson Scan previews your original and displays the result in a separate Preview window If you are using the ADF reinsert your original into the ADF If desired select the area in your preview image that you want to scan scan area Note You cannot select a scan area if you chose ADF Double sided as the Document Source setting Click the Image Adjustment tab and select any of the image adjustment settings you want to use Before making adjustments click the image or scan area in the Preview window Click Scan You see the File Save Settings window Change any of the necessary file save settings and click OK Epson Scan scans your original and saves the file in the selected folder or opens it in your scanning program If the file was saved directly to your computer you see the file in the Windows Explorer or OS X Finder where you can view an
6. Note This product uses only genuine Epson brand cartridges Other brands of ink cartridges and ink supplies are not compatible and even if described as compatible may not function properly The cartridges included with the printer are designed for printer setup and not for resale After some ink is used for priming the rest is available for printing Yields vary considerably based on images printed print settings paper type frequency of use and temperature For print quality a variable amount of ink remains in the cartridge after the replace cartridge indicator comes on Color Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Cartridge life Opened package 6 months Unopened package do not use if the date on the package has expired Temperature Storage 4 to 104 F 20 to 40 C 1 month at 104 F 40 C Ink freezes at 9 4 F 23 C Ink thaws and is usable after 3 hours at 77 F 25 C Note For best printing results use up a cartridge within 6 months after installing it Parent topic Technical Specifications Dimension Specifications Height Stored 18 3 inches 464 mm printer only Printing 22 1 inches 562 mm 416 Height Stored 44 6 inches 1132 mm printer with three optional Printing 48 4 inches 1230 mm cassette units and cabinet Width Stored 23 2 inches 590 mm printer only Printing 23 2 inches 590 mm Width Stored 27 2 inches 690 mm printer with three optional Printing 27 2 inches 690 mm
7. Parent topic General Product Safety Instructions Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions When using telephone equipment you should always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and personal injury including the following Do not use the Epson product near water e Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Caution To reduce the risk of fire use only a No 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord Parent topic General Product Safety Instructions 439 Cabinet Safety Instructions e Do not install any other product on the cabinet besides the printer and paper cassettes mentioned in this manual Do not climb on the cabinet or place heavy objects on it e Make sure the stands are securely attached to the cabinet or the product may fall over e Make sure the casters on the cabinet are locked when using the printer Do not move the cabinet when the casters are locked e Avoid rolling the cabinet over uneven or rough surfaces with the printer installed Parent topic General Product Safety Instructions FCC Compliance Statement For United States Users This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the surface of this equipment is a
8. Select a lower Resolution setting Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related topics Selecting Epson Scan Settings Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors Printed colors can never exactly match the colors on your computer monitor because printers and monitors use different color systems monitors use RGB red green and blue and printers typically use CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black Check the color matching and color management capabilities of your computer display adapter and the software you are using to see if they are affecting the palette of colors you see on your screen To adjust the colors in your scanned image adjust these Epson Scan settings if available and try scanning again Change the Image Type setting and experiment with different combinations of the next settings e Adjust the Tone Correction setting 399 e Adjust the Auto Exposure setting Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related topics Selecting Epson Scan Settings Scan Area is Not Adjustable in Thumbnail Preview If you cannot adjust the scan area while viewing a Thumbnail preview in Epson Scan try these solutions e Create a scan area by drawing a marquee on your preview image and adjusting it as necessary e Switch to Normal preview mode if available and preview your image again Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related concepts Image Preview Guidelines Related tas
9. This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details 456 You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to signa copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by
10. You can select these Image Adjustments options in Epson Scan Office Mode Not all adjustment settings may be available depending on other settings you have chosen Main Settings l Image Adjustment harp Mask e Image Option Text Enhancement Syst sc C ile Ent ance Nor e Skip Blank Pages of 9 Edge Fill None v Note Select the Image Option checkbox if you need to set any of the grayed out image adjustments beneath the checkbox Not all adjustment settings may be available depending on the Image Type setting Unsharp Mask Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer Turn off this option to leave softer edges Descreening Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas such as skin tones This option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers The results of descreening do not appear in the preview image only in your scanned image Text Enhancement Sharpens the appearance of letters in text documents Auto Area Segmentation Makes grayscale images clearer and text recognition more accurate by separating the text from the graphics Color Enhance Enhances the red green or blue shades in the scanned image 217 Skip Blank Pages Ensures that your product does not scan pages that contain no text or images Edge Fill Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with the color you select Brightness Adjusts the overall lightness and da
11. A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials ccccceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeteteeeteneees 493 Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeee 493 Copyright Attributi Mese a E a 493 14 WF 8590 User s Guide Welcome to the WF 8590 User s Guide For aprintable PDF copy of this guide click here 15 Product Basics See these sections to learn about the basic features of your product Using the Control Panel Product Parts Locations Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and More Using AirPrint Using Google Cloud Print Using the Control Panel See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings Control Panel Buttons and Lights Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel Setting User Feature Restrictions Access Control Changing LCD Screen Language Adjusting Control Panel Sounds Adjusting the Screen Brightness Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting Parent topic Product Basics 16 Control Panel Buttons and Lights The power button and light The ff home button The Interrupt button The 4 Reset button The Stop button The LCD screen The 5 back button The Status button and lights The numeric keypad The C clear button The B amp W button The Color button ON DOO FW N lt a O MD O
12. None Descreening None Backlight Correction None Dust Removal None __ Color Restoration _ Quiet Mode Hide Details 236 Note If you are scanning a multi page document in the ADF you can have Image Capture combine all the pages into a single document After all pages have been scanned you see the message No document loaded 5 Select the folder in which you want to save your scanned file in the Scan To pop up menu 6 Click Scan Your scanned file is saved in the folder you selected Available Scan Settings OS X Image Capture Parent topic Scanning Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Available Scan Settings OS X Image Capture You can select these scan settings in your imaging editing application for OS X if available Image Correction Provides a graphical interface for adjusting brightness tint temperature and saturation Unsharp Mask Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer Turn off this option to leave softer edges Descreening Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas such as skin tones This option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers The results of descreening do not appear in the preview image only in your scanned image Backlight Correction Removes shadows from photos that have too much background light Dust Removal Removes dust marks from your originals automatically Color Restora
13. Paper type Loading capacity Paper cassettes Rear paper feed slot Front paper feed slot Plain paper A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches 50 sheets sat x 420 mm Up to the arrow mark Letter 8 5 x 11 inches 80 sheets 216 x 279 mm A4 8 3 x 11 7 inches 210 x 297 mm and Legal 8 5 x 14 inches 216 x 356 mm Up to the arrow mark Epson Bright White Paper 200 sheets cassette 1 50 sheets 1 400 sheets cassettes 2 to 4 75 Paper type Loading capacity Paper cassettes Rear paper feed slot Front paper feed slot Epson Presentation Paper Matte A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches pay x 420 mm and larger 50 sheets Letter 8 5 x 11 inches 216 x 279 mm and smaller 70 sheets Epson Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches a coe Photo Paper 297 x 420 mm and g larger Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy 10 sheets Letter 8 5 x 11 inches Epson Premium Presentation aa Nite 216 x 279 mm and smaller Epson Premium Presentation 20 sheet Paper Matte Double sided Steels Epson Brochure amp Flyer Paper Matte Double sided Thick paper cardstock up to 68 Ib A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches 256 g m 297 x 420 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 inches 216 x 279 mm and A4 8 3 x 11 7 inches 210 x 297 mm 10 sheets Envelopes O envelopes 76 You can print 2 sided print jobs automatically or manually You can only print 2 sided print jobs manually in the rear paper feed slot Load up
14. Select the copying options you want to use for your copies Note Not all options or settings may be available depending on other copying settings 109 Copying option _ Available settings Layout With Border Leaves a small margin around the image or document 2 up Copy Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet Also up Payot Settings and change the Document Orientation and up Layout Order settings as necessary ID Card Copies both sides of an ID card onto one side of a sheet of paper Split Pages Copies two facing pages of a book onto separate sheets of paper Select the document size of your original Paper Source Various sources Select the paper source that you want to use If you select Auto paper is fed automatically depending on the paper settings you selected for the paper sources Automatically sizes the image by the percentage you select Copies at 100 size Auto Fit Page Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you selected Letter gt 4x6in and Automatically converts from one size to another other conversions Of sd Select to make 2 sided copies When you select 1 gt 2 Sided 252 Sided or 2 gt 1 Sided also select Advanced and select the binding edge for your originals or copies 1 gt 2 Sided 2 gt 1 Sided Document Portrait Specifies the orientation of your originals Orientation Quality Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts the quality of your copies Photo O 110
15. select ColorSync Select one of the available Profile options to change the active color profile e To use the product s default color matching select In printer Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Printing Your Document or Photo PostScript Printer Software OS X Once you have selected your print settings you are ready to print Click Print at the bottom of the print window Printer Features Feature Sets Quality MediaType Plain Print Quality Fine Cancel Print Checking Print Status PostScript Printer Software OS X Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Checking Print Status PostScript Printer Software OS X During printing you can view the progress of your print job control printing and check ink status 1 Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock 190 You see the print status window 4 About Downloads amp 2 Select the following options as necessary OS X 10 5 10 6 10 7 e To cancel printing click the print job and click the Delete icon To pause a print job click the print job and click the Hold icon To resume a print job click the print job marked Hold and click the Resume icon To pause printing for all queued print jobs click the Pause Printer icon e To check ink status click the Supply Levels icon OS X 10 8 10 9 To cancel printing click the J button next to the
16. 10Mbps Full duplex 10Mbps Half duplex 100Mbps Full duplex 100Mbps Half duplex Connector RJ 45 Security Protocol e IEEE802 1X requires a connected device compliant with IEEE802 1X e IPsec IP Filtering e SSL TLS HTTPS Server Client and IPPS e SNMPv3 Parent topic Technical Specifications Safety and Approvals Specifications United States Safety UL60950 1 EMC FCC part 15 Subpart B class B 420 Canada Safety CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 EMC CAN CSA CEI IEC CISPR 22 Class B This equipment contains the following wireless module e Manufacturer Askey Computer Corporation e Type WLU6117 D69 RoHS This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS 210 of the IC Rules Epson cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing Parent topic Technical Specifications PS3 Mode Fonts Albertus Albertus Italic Albertus Light AntiqueOlive Roman AntiqueOlive I
17. 17 Status Icon Information Status Button Information Parent topic Using the Control Panel Status Icon Information Your product may display status icons on the LCD screen for certain product status conditions Press ial to view or change the current network settings GF eee eo ee aan Displays additional information or instructions such as on loading paper or placing a document ADF A eC is in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF iiia or more of the ink cartridges are running low on ink or the maintenance box is nearly full Press the Status button to open the Status Menu select Printer Information and check the status of the consumables One or more of the ink cartridges are expended or the maintenance box is full Press the i Status button to open the Status Menu select Printer Information and check the status of the consumables Unread or unprinted fax data is stored in the product If you have set up the product to save received faxes on a computer or external storage device this icon may also indicate that received faxes have not been saved on the computer or storage device Fax memory is full Delete received faxes you have already read or printed If you have set up the product to save received faxes on a computer or external storage device turn on the computer or connect the storage device to the product A Wi Fi or an Ethernet connection is being processed No Ethernet connection A An Eth
18. 2 Select Fax You see a screen like this T Contacts eT M 4 History a Document Si 4 On Hook er Preset Select Menu Select Polling Receive and select On Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from D nego Press one of the buttons to start receiving the fax Parent topic Receiving Faxes Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen You can save received faxes in your product s memory and view them on the LCD screen Note To use this feature you must first enable Save to Inbox from the Output Settings menu The Inbox can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access the Inbox contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 301 6 7 Check the E icon on the LCD screen It turns on if there are any unread or unprinted faxes in the product s memory Select Fax Select Open Inbox Enter the administrator password if necessary Select the fax you want to view You see the fax displayed on the screen Select Menu Select one of the printer deleting options and follow the on screen instructions Note Delete faxes after you print or view them to prevent the product s memory from filling up When the memory is full you cannot receive or send faxes Parent topic Receiving Faxes Checking Fax Status You can use the Status button to check the status of current fax jobs or faxes that have been received or sent 1 Press the
19. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above ona medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and 445 so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that componen
20. Automatic Document Feeder ADF Specifications Paper size Paper type Paper weight Sheet feeding capacity A5 to A3 Plain paper 14 Ib 52 g m to 28 Ib 105 g m Total thickness 0 2 inch 5 mm Approximately 50 sheets at 20 Ib 75 g m Parent topic Technical Specifications Fax Specifications Fax type Walk up black and white and color fax capability ITU T Super Group 3 412 Support lines Standard analog telephone lines PBX Private Branch Exchange telephone systems Speed Up to 33 6 kbps Resolution Monochrome Standard 203 pixels per inch x 98 lines per inch 8 pixels per mm x 3 85 lines per mm Fine 203 pixels per inch x 196 lines per inch 8 pixels per mm x 7 7 lines per mm Super Fine 203 pixels per inch x 392 lines per inch 8 pixels per mm x 15 4 lines per mm Ultra Fine 203 pixels per inch x 392 lines per inch 8 pixels per mm x 15 4 lines per mm Photo 203 pixels per inch x 196 lines per inch 8 pixels per mm x 7 7 lines per mm Color Fine 200 x 200 dpi Photo 200 x 200 dpi Error correction mode CCITU ITU Group 3 fax with error correction mode Page memory Up to 550 pages ITU T No 1 chart monochrome draft mode Redial 2 times with 1 minute intervals Interface RJ 11 Phone Line RJ 11 Telephone set connection Parent topic Technical Specifications Paper Specifications Note Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at
21. Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click the postscript driver for your product and select Properties 2 Click any tab to view and change the printer property settings Parent topic Solving PostScript Printing Problems Solving Problems Printing from a Computer Check these sections if you have problems while printing from your computer Note When printing using AirPrint the available print settings are different from those covered in this manual See the Apple website for details Note For problems while printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript PS3 printer software see the sections covering that software in this manual Nothing Prints Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar Printing is Slow Parent topic Solving Problems Nothing Prints If you have sent a print job and nothing prints try these solutions Make sure your product is turned on Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends If you connected your product to a USB hub make sure it is a first tier hub If it still does not print connect your product directly to your computer instead of the hub Run a product check to see if a test page prints If the test page prints check to see if your product software is installed correctly If you are printing a large image the computer may not have enough memory Print the image ata lower resolution or a smaller file size In Windows click Print Queue
22. Editing or Deleting a Contact ssccecets cacciecaetdceatncensbagadets capcenenay a tie es aad a rebssetavcaaede eee eeeestent ena 272 Creating a Contact Group aa 2t 2 2 Ace Dic taal ceadu tears ae eroteret cee caanaenisee cee mteems ate suadeamunaiomcaneate ses 273 Editing or Deleting a Contact Groups s ccsciisitaucebhs trod ncel ge cigasealaeae Ronee aoa eeceaetee ete 275 Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility WINGOWS cccccccesesteeeeeeeesssneaees 277 Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility OS X cc ecceeecccecceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeesssaaees 281 Sending Faxe Spe sa a a E a e E ea 283 Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeteeeeeeeess 283 Sending a Fax Using the Keypad Contact List or HIStory c ccccccceeseseeeeeeeesssssseeeeeeeeeeees 283 FS CMGI GOD TONS sc carers ses tocmlana e E E E E duetitea ida ce E EER RRT 285 Sending a Fax at a Specified Time gcc essed ceases Secor Dearie pao teev nd eee edes eee ene 287 Sending a Fax on Demand sch asccteimaninhs e ena aae aa a bien aaa aiia 288 sendinga Stored Fae Adres ie ears vende e aae er a aee danced cotter Ge deeds oes 289 Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone cceeecceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeneeees 291 Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility WINGOWS 0 0 ceeecceeeee eee eee eee eeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeneeeeseaeeees 292 Sending Faxes Using t
23. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your fax settings Note For detailed information select the FAX Utility icon Parent topic Setting Up Fax Features Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups You can set up a list of contacts and their fax numbers so you can quickly select them for faxing You can also set up contact groups to send a fax message to multiple contacts Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility Windows Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility OS X Parent topic Faxing 269 Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel You can set up your contacts and contact groups using the control panel on your product Note Contacts can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change contacts contact your administrator for assistance Creating a Contact Editing or Deleting a Contact Creating a Contact Group Editing or Deleting a Contact Group Parent topic Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Related tasks Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility Windows Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility OS X Creating a Contact You can create a list of contacts to save frequently used fax numbers Note You can create up to 100 contacts and contact groups combined 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Fax You s
24. Ot ee a Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software Windows If you installed optional paper cassette units you need to enable the optional cassette units before you can use them with the PS3 printer software 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click your product name and select Printer properties 172 e Windows 7 Click amp and select Devices and Printers Right click your product name and select Printer Properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound then right click your product name and select Properties e Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click your product name and select Properties 2 Click the Device Settings tab You see a window like this General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Securty Device Settings am 4 fae Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 32767 KB Output Protocot ASCI Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray No Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 0 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s E fm installable Options L
25. Status button You see a screen like this WW Situs Hema Printer Imhamaion E ab Maniter il Job History it Storoae al Confidential Job 0 2 Doone of the following e To check the status of currrent fax jobs select Job Monitor select Communication Job and select the fax job you want to check 302 e To check the history of faxes that have been sent or received select Job History select Receive Job or Send Job and select the job you want to check e To check received faxes that have been saved in the product s memory select Job Storage and select Inbox Parent topic Faxing Printing Fax Reports You can select from several fax reports to print whenever necessary You can also have the fax log printed automatically by turning on Fax Log Auto Print 1 Press the f home button if necessary 2 Select Fax You see a screen like this re Resolution Contacts SS Imc History Om Hogk re Preset 3 Select Menu select Fax Report and select the report you want to print Fax Report Options Parent topic Faxing Fax Report Options Select the fax report or list you want to print Fax Settings List Print a list of the current fax communication settings Fax Log View or print a report on recent fax transmissions 303 Last Transmission Print a report on the previous fax that was sent or received through polling Stored Fax Documents Print a list of the fax jobs cu
26. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES 484 INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Portions Copyright 2008 Pierangelo Masarati All rights reserved Copyright c 2000 2001 Aaron D Gifford All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of contributors may be used to endorse or promote products d
27. To create additional marquees up to 50 if available click the i Copy Marquee icon to copy the existing marquee and paste it on the preview image To delete a marquee click the marquee then click the Eg Delete Marquee icon e Thumbnail preview To change the preview style click one of the Size icons Note If you draw multiple marquees make sure you select the All button in the Preview window before you scan Otherwise only the area inside the currently selected marquee will be scanned 3 Click inside the scan area and make any necessary settings in the Epson Scan window Parent topic Scanning in Professional Mode Available Image Adjustments Professional Mode You can select these Adjustments options in Epson Scan Professional Mode Not all adjustment settings may be available depending on other settings you have chosen Adjustments m la eet E o Gee V Unsharp Mask Descreening Color Restoration Backlight Correction Dust Removal Note Select the Image Option checkbox if you need to set any of the grayed out image adjustments beneath the checkbox 225 Click the image adjustment icon to access additional settings Click the Windows or gt OS X icon next to a setting to change the level of adjustment Unsharp Mask Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer Turn off this option to leave softer edges Descreening Removes the ripple pattern that might a
28. Windows You can select maintenance and other optional settings on the Maintenance tab Extercied Settings ee Print Queue TE Printer and Option Information Note For more information about a setting right click it and select Help e Nozzle Check lets you print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles Head Cleaning lets you clean the print head Network printer search lets you search for and connect to a product on the network Job Arranger Lite lets you save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs Extended Settings lets you change a variety of print settings Print Queue displays all the print jobs in queue You can also cancel or restart print jobs 162 Printer and Option Information displays information on the printer settings and any optional equipment installed e Language lets you change the language of the printer software screens Extended Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Extended Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows You can select from these settings on the Extended Settings window A tiwas Spec RAW Catatype Port aa Dirag aetre syang sanen paT dor the Oriver s Paper Source bening of Uses the isie setings specified A the anpbcaten Colate Uang Panter Driver Output
29. _ Epson Connect Services a Google Choad Print Services 251 Select Common Settings fey Connon Settings Dale Tine Settings Select Date Time Settings You see a screen like this fy Dates Tine Settings Select Daylight Saving Time Select the setting that applies to your area Winter it is winter or your region does not use Daylight Saving Time DST e Summer it is spring or summer and your region uses Daylight Saving Time DST Note If your region uses Daylight Saving Time DST you must change this setting to match the season When you change from Winter to Summer your product automatically sets its clock ahead one hour When you change from Summer to Winter it sets its clock back one hour Select Date Time 252 9 Select the date format you want to use 10 Use the numeric keypad to enter the current date 11 Select the time format you want to use 12 Use the numeric keypad to enter the current time Parent topic Setting Up Basic Fax Features Using the Fax Setup Wizard You can setup the product s basic fax settings using the Fax Setting Wizard This wizard is automatically displayed when the product is turned on for the first time You can also change these settings individually from the Fax Settings menu Note These settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change these setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if nec
30. size and other settings for the custom anti copy pattern Various text Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit watermarks watermarks Add Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image based watermark Lets you select the size position color and other watermark settings Header Footer lof sd Prohibits headers or footers Ons Allows headers and footers Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and or footers Color 2 sided printing Off Allows printing on one side of the paperonly jon Allows printing on both sides of the paper Multi Page Off Prohibits multi page settings 2 Up Prints 2 pages on one sheet of paper Up Prints 4pagesononesheetofpaper Parent topic Locking Printer Settings Windows Entering a User ID and Password for Printing If Access Control is enabled on the product a user ID and password may be required to print You can enter the user ID and password in the printer driver Note If you do not know the user ID or password contact your administrator for assistance 132 1 Click the Maintenance tab BQ Nozde Check Mead Cleaning AVA Prot read Alignment Click the Printer and Option Information button Select the Save Access Control Settings checkbox Click the Settings button Enter your user name and password Click OK Parent topic Printing with Windows D Ua e O MN Selecting Default Print Settings Windows When you ch
31. your product you may need to set up your product s file sharing settings Caution Remove the flash drive before you change this setting or you may lose data from the flash drive Note These settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the f home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 310 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary 4 Select Printer Settings 5 Select Memory Device Interface You see a screen like this fe Memory Device Interface oie Ele Sharing is 6 Make sure Memory Device is set to Enable 7 Select File Sharing 8 Select the way your computer is connected to the product either USB or Wi Fi Network Parent topic Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive Related tasks Removing a USB Flash Drive Transferring Files from a USB Flash Drive to Your Computer You can transfer files to and from a USB flash drive inserted into the USB port on the front of your product and a computer connected to your product Note Do not transfer files to and from a flash drive while you are printing from the flash drive Make sure your product is connected to a computer Insert a flash drive into the USB port on the front of your product 3 Doone of the following to access your flash drive files from your computer Windows Select the Computer or My Computer utility then
32. 194 You see a screen like this Scan to Emai Hetwork Folder TP Bemar Devine 4 Select Email You see a screen like this Ea Enni Pe Enter Email Address lipa 200d Letter 8 1 Sided Scan Text 5 Doone of the following e Select Contacts and choose an email address e Select Enter Email Address then select Enter Email Address vs display the keyboard Use the keyboard to enter the address for the recipient and press F 6 Select Format to choose the file format for your scan 7 Select Menu and select Email Settings Change the Subject and Filename Prefix if necessary then press the 5 back button to return to the Email screen 195 8 Select Preset to save your scan settings Note Presets can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 9 Press one of the buttons Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file Parent topic Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Configuring Email Server Settings Selecting the Date and Time Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product s control panel You can either enter the folder path directly on the product s control panel or select a folder from the Contacts list Note Make sure t
33. COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES ORA FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt
34. EEEE EEEE e fv E sm2 Adaa Latin 2 aa ae Ae fel K a ae Windows 3 1 Latin Arabic porss leew 7 v v le adadad Cyrillic 430 al Pea PC 851 Greek ISO 8859 5 10N Cyrillic PC 8 12G VA EVA Greek ISO 8859 7 12N Y v Greek PC 866 UKR Hebrew7 Honen 8859 8 oH Hebrew Hebrews BEE EEE EE me PPEEEEEPEEEEEE Hebrew ee ee eee eee Hebrew aS a a ee ee es ee aed el ee 431 aa Pane OCRB Extension ff oe a a nn ISO Italian e Italian e ae cam sotaan 8859 1 Latin 1 ao e fe a en ae an ee ISO United Kingdom Latin 2 ev ef romans fe f pwn pe i ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 432 ee ee ee Windows 3 1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859 10 a 6 Windows 3 1 Latin 2 rf ISO 8859 15 Latin 9 ee Eee eel Windows 3 1 Latin 1 dee oo O E E Si ee N T N a a aoea e E PC 866 Cyrillic Grek ee m Windows Greek Windows Cyrillic a a ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic PC S Greek Peta ISO 8859 7 Greek o ee Se A a per fs ISO 8859 8 Hebrew 434 Font classification EC EE hk b jb p je J wewa o e eee eea eesse o EEE EENE Parent topic Technical Specifications 435 Notices Check these sections for important notices about your product Note Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products Please go to this site for information on how to return your products for proper disposal General Pro
35. Epson Scan scanning software Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for enhancing scanned images and provides an interface for TWAIN compliant OCR scanning software To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads 1 Open your scanning program and select its scanning option See your scanning program help for instructions 2 Select your product Note In certain programs you may need to select your product as the source first If you see a Select Source option choose it and select your product With Windows do not select a WIA option for your product it will not work correctly 208 You see an Epson Scan window like this EPSON Scan ere Delete Auto Detect Letter 8 5 x 11 in None Om Ei C Conget Document Skew Rotate o Image Type Resojtion Ta Hep Note Epson Scan may start in a different mode when you first access it Parent topic Starting a Scan 209 Related tasks Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Windows Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Selecting Epson Scan Settings After starting Epson Scan you can select settings in various modes to customize your scan Scan Modes Selecting the Scan Mode Scanning in Office Mode Scanning in Professional Mode Image Preview Guidelines Scan Resolution Guidelines Selecting Scan File Settings Parent topic Scanning Sc
36. Grayscale Prints text and graphics in black or shades of gray Mirror Image Lets you flip the printed image horizontally Parent topic Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Selecting Page Setup Settings OS X Depending on your application you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from the print window Paper Size US Letter gt 8 50 by 11 00 inches Orientation le i Note If you do not see these settings in the print window check for them in your application before printing They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu 1 Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting 2 Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window fe Note If you are printing an envelope select the icon Note You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the pop up menu and selecting a scaling option Parent topic Printing with OS X 142 Selecting Print Layout Options OS X You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the pop up menu on the print window Layout Pages per Sheet 1 2 yi ivi mm Border None Reverse page orientation Flip horizontally Cancel Print To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet pop up menu To arrange the print order of the pages sel
37. Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeetenneeeeees 86 Installing the Optional Cabinet 2 caccccicscnccpsedeey ceanagaadsntedenseansthanecnntcnauaaceepebdecscanacndseessaveccuannbsdieetee 87 Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units s a cs iiendhietine aes onriend A ine eileen 94 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes WINGOWS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeteenaeeeeenneeees 101 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes OS X oo eeeecceeeccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeeenneeees 102 Placing Originals on the Product ivses eicccis cates ses cctee nesses ect ees kee sea he ce et Ree aati 104 Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass c c ii cc cecesceencaguac octegececua neg enceneeeeigguadeveieees see Acndeusastenspunnsend 104 Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder cccccceeeeecceeeeseeeeeeseeceeeeeaaeeeeseseeeteeeeaeees 105 GOD YA isin dcr ne ass a ceege Sc beeswe doe dpuc E suc uc geversarceseancueereuseceuetaacereeaszese 108 Copying Documents or PROIOS sis Seccnss ies sge be neeeshecheeias Seon vtad beaebecueneds vyadetan dormueeee ea ieanas Meeepisenibeadeunnaes 108 COPYING Options isi eere a a gates dudedetsatatedses aa a ap Ea EREE aaa aE AE aa detec EANES 109 Printing froma Computer issii iaeaea owe da ae eaa a ate tat ea aeae ire a aaan a aesaad cto iaat 112 Printing with WinGOWS o iiia aeaa easa a ENE EE Ga TA AEA Raai 112 Select
38. Mode Print as Bruo Shap Bark Page Cnange Stara Resok aon Cl Refine socero panen Allow Acphcators ti Perform 20M Coley Matching May Use the Dam Paper Source Setting QAAE page Gocments fpcecowe in Gded oce Reset Oefouts x Cored kee 5 Select any of the extended settings to customize your print 6 Click OK to close the Extended Settings window 7 Click OK to close the printer software window Extended Settings Windows Parent topic Printing with Windows Extended Settings Windows You can select from these settings on the Extended Settings window Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 Enables product monitoring for ink and paper supplies and other issues Check Paper Width Before Printing Prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper if the paper size setting is incorrect may reduce print speed Thick Paper and Envelopes Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper 127 Short Grain Paper Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper and the Thick Paper setting does not help Separator Page Before each document prints a separator page containing the title user date and time Always Spool RAW Datatype Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems Page Rendering Mode Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing Print as Bitmap Increases print speed when printing is extreme
39. Mode i siuj cccuideceecanhigeatahdecsadohinnsbinthlensinendtedneaebend eaenennanbelts 214 Available Image Adjustments Office Mode 0 eceeceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeene 217 Scanning in Professional Mode i yiciiecc cece oxencctancicdendee cenctadsae tend eae ee dhestavannstnaaeedeadeavdaclacpoebtaedeage 218 Available Document Source Settings Professional Mode ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeees 221 Available Image Types Professional Mode ccccccceeeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeesneeeeeeeaeeeennae 221 Selecting a Scan Area Professional Mode cccececcceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseseeeeeeeeaaeeeenes 222 Available Image Adjustments Professional Mode ccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeess 225 Selecting a Scan Size Professional MOde cccscceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneneeeeeeeaaeeeenes 227 Image Preview GuidelineS ssa aes tesco ec nce canarias Sete ba teas este ota aed ned ach aeons 230 Scan Resolution Guidelines 3 5 sas cae oe teat A et Aasecs sacks dane dey dence Sta ea dene eau tcbepauaeeane came depaanase 230 Selecting Scan File Settings ag aces cas cat ss sa ete acest oc ated eed veo nce cde aca tt dese Moateedetebeed a ieee 232 Available Scanned File Types and Optional SettingS ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture eeccceesceeeescseceeeeaeeeeeesaee
40. Next gt If every square contains a band select the square with the thinnest band or bands Then dick Realignment 5 Check the printed pattern and follow the instructions on the screen to choose the number representing the best printed pattern for each set Vertical alignment i M 1 3 4 1 340 Horizontal alignment iii m 3 E ee e After choosing each pattern number click Next If no patterns are aligned in one or more of the sets choose the closest one in each set and click Realignment Then print another alignment sheet and check it Note Click Skip where available if you want to skip a particular alignment sheet 6 When you are done click Finish Parent topic Print Head Alignment Related topics Loading Paper Cleaning the Paper Guide If you see ink on the back of a printout you can clean the paper guide rollers to remove any excess ink If paper does not feed correctly from the rear paper feed slot you can use a cleaning sheet to clean the rollers 1 Doone of the following e If printouts are smeared or scuffed load plain paper in the paper source that you want to clean in this size A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches 297 x 420 mm If paper does not feed correctly from the rear paper feed slot load the cleaning sheet that comes with genuine Epson paper in the rear paper feed slot Press the ft home button if necessary 3 Select Setup Select Maintenance 341 You see
41. OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww OpenSSL org Written by Corinne Dive Reclus cdive baltimore com Copyright 2001 Baltimore Technologies Ltd All right Reserved THIS FILE IS PROVIDED BY BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
42. Parent topic Print Head Maintenance 329 Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product 1 Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product Press the ff home button if necessary Select Setup Select Maintenance arrow DN You see a screen like this o Print Head Hogzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Thick Paper Paper Guide Cleaning 6 Select Print Head Nozzle Check You see a screen like this Bj Print Head Hoge Check Load Letier Ad site Plein Paper to print narzie check palten Press E 7 Press the Color button 330 10 The nozzle pattern prints Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines Print head is clean U gt t g a Ss D Q 17 2 p o i l l IMMA Do one of the following e lf there are no gaps select Done e If there are gaps or the pattern is faint select Clean the Print Head and continue Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head check the nozzles and repeat the process as necessary Caution Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not be able to print If you don t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times turn off the product if p
43. Printing Preferences OS X You can select from these settings on the Options or Driver tab Thick Paper and Envelopes Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper Skip Blank Page Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images Quiet Mode Lessens noise during printing but may decrease print speed Permit temporary black printing Allows you to print using black ink when color ink is expended 149 High Speed Printing Speeds up printing but may reduce print quality Warning Notifications Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various operating conditions Establish bidirectional communication Allows the product to communicate with the computer Do not change the default setting unless you experience issues when using a shared printing pool Parent topic Selecting Printing Preferences OS X Printing Your Document or Photo OS X Once you have selected your print settings you are ready to print Click Print at the bottom of the print window Print Settings Paper Source Auto Select Media Type Plain Paper Bright White Paper Print Quality Normal Grayscale V Mirror Image Cancel Checking Print Status OS X Parent topic Printing with OS X Checking Print Status OS X During printing you can view the progress of your print job control printing and check ink status 150 1 Cli
44. Receiving Faxes Checking Fax Status Printing Fax Reports Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine You must connect your product to a telephone wall jack to send or receive faxes If you want to use the same telephone line to receive calls you can connect a telephone or answering machine to your product using an additional phone cable Note If you do not connect a telephone to your product make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto Otherwise you cannot receive faxes 243 1 Connect a phone cable to your telephone wall jack and to the LINE port on your product Note If you have a DSL or ISDN connection you must connect the appropriate DSL filter or ISDN terminal adapter or router to the wall jack to be able to use the line for faxing or voice calls using your product Contact your DSL or ISDN provider for the necessary equipment 244 DSL connection 1 Telephone wall jack 2 DSL filter 3 DSL modem 245 ISDN connection 1 ISDN wall jack 2 Terminal adapter or ISDN router 246 2 Ifyou are connecting a telephone or answering machine to your product using a second phone cable remove the cap from the EXT port on your product 247 3 Connect a second phone cable to your telephone or answering machine and to the EXT port on your product Note If you connect an answering machine and Receive Mode is set to Auto set the number of rings before yo
45. Royal Institute of Technology Stockholm Sweden All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING 470 NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
46. SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 5 Sparta Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2003 2004 Sparta Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Sparta Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 463 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEG
47. The recipient s fax machine is busy Wait a moment then try again The recipient s fax machine does not answer Wait a moment then try again 351 Condition solution 206 The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the product s LINE and EXT ports Connect the phone cable correctly The phone cable is not connected Connect the phone cable The fax could not be sent to some of the specified recipients Print a fax log to check which recipients failed to receive the fax If the Save Failure Data setting is turned on you can resend a fax from Job Monitor in the Status Menu 301 There is not enough storage space available to save the data in the external memory 401 device Clear space on the device or use a different device 302 The external memory device is write protected Disable write protection 402 303 No folder is available for saving the scanned file Create a folder or use a different memory device The external memory device has been removed Reinsert the device An error occurred while saving data to an external memory device Reinsert the memory device or use a different device The The product s memory is full Wait until current jobs are finished processing memory is full Wait until current jobs are finished processing A DNS error has occurred Check the DNS settings for the server computer or access point DNS settings for the server can be checked from the DNS Server option in the Setup menu An auth
48. WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to signa copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vi
49. WP OX S 192 168 1 131 C EPSON Universal Part Driver WF 3000S 192 168 1 126 Select a prrter from the lst to set t as the defaut pater Help Abot 155 The selected products appear in the lower section of the screen 10 Select the checkbox next to a product to make it your default printer if necessary 11 Click OK Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Synchronizing Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows You may need to synchronize the printer driver with the product if the printer driver does not detect the correct information or settings from the product Note You must sync the printer driver before you can use any optional equipment installed on the product such as an optional cassette unit 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound then right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties 2 Click the Optional Settings tab 156 You see
50. X Managing Color PostScript Printer Software OS X Printing Your Document or Photo PostScript Printer Software OS X Parent topic Printing from a Computer Installing the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X If you did not install the standard Epson printer software you need to install the PostScript PS3 printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer Note Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before installing the printer software 1 P poi SN el ae G N Download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package PS3 PostScript from epson com support wf8590 Double click the downloaded package Double click EPSON Click Continue on the next two screens Click Agree Click Install If necessary enter the administrator password Click Start and follow the on screen instructions arent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software OS X If you installed optional paper cassette units you need to enable the optional cassette units before you can use them with the PS3 printer software 1 2 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Driver or Options 180 You see a screen lik
51. a New Wi Fi Router Configuring Email Server Settings Disabling Wi Fi Features Parent topic Wi Fi or Wired Networking Accessing the Web Config Utility You can select your product s network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser You do this by accessing your product s built in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is connected to the same network as your product Note For more information on the Web Config utility see the Administrator s Guide Print a network status sheet Locate the IP Address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product open a web browser 4 Enter your product s IP address into the address bar You see the available Web Config utility options Parent topic Changing or Updating Network Connections Related tasks Printing a Network Status Sheet 54 Changing a USB Connection to a Wi Fi Connection If you have already connected your product to your computer using a USB connection you can change to a Wi Fi connection or add a Wi Fi connection to print wirelessly 1 Doone of the following e If you want to use only a Wi Fi connection disconnect the USB cable from your product With Windows also uninstall your product software e If you want to add a Wi Fi connection in addition to a USB connection leave the USB cable connected to your product 2 Download and install
52. a screen like this Maintenance l Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Thick Paper i Paper Guide Cleaning Scroll down and select Paper Guide Cleaning Select the paper source you want to clean Press the Color button If you are cleaning the paper guides repeat as necessary until the paper comes out clean If you are using a cleaning sheet repeat these steps up to 3 times oN OM Note If the paper is not clean after cleaning several times try cleaning the other paper sources Parent topic Adjusting Print Quality Related topics Loading Paper 342 Cleaning and Transporting Your Product See these sections if you need to clean or transport your product Cleaning Your Product Transporting Your Product Cleaning Your Product To keep your product working at its best you should clean it several times a year Caution Do not use a hard brush alcohol or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it Turn off the product Unplug the power cord Disconnect any connected cables Remove all the paper from the product fe 343 5 Clean the scanner glass and the glass area on the left with a soft lint free cloth microfiber is recommended moistened with a little glass cleaner Caution Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surfac
53. aaa SEA A A EEE Ed an 41 Using Google Cloud Print a2 cak sen lace hats cece ceneateerpete Aeccma ance ey atauecoeea ees tasaohaceesacvney sana ceensemmnninasuees 42 Setting Up Google Cloud Print on a Chromebook c ceeeccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeceeeensaeeeeeeneneeeee 43 Wi Fi or Wired NOTWORKING acc sccctanasaecutecsindiiascute sisasanimeneodenai ea conecureetins sasaasacdernanunaaneutvesdteannaueuentrinrauenaceie 45 Wi Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup escic ucla tesasccbeck ens cbechedcetideceste coin seceneesounedeies sececeenbimaers vseeeepedelaadtoenes 45 Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeseeennees 46 Wi Fi Direct Mode Setup oe aacac 2 eee cctncntjatensS agdcnetatsusee deeegcnante tarete ces aeausg caaet acted eeduadenepaarecdeeanatec come meee 48 Enabling Wi Fi Direct Modeion a tend aera aetna 49 Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS sc2ctirjeceesah tcc eda sea wesc ati cea aeece dae ac eadesvectey aust caeeaage ceoeeen cman te 52 Using WPS to Connect to a Network are icsch ute fecteece Satehedies cotveuteautd Sexeeae tel ced racecar ie dienes 52 Printing a Network Status Sheet i 00 40 ied asieeaviatee ace wi atin nedanaeeade ete 53 Changing or Updating Network Connections c cccceeceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeesenaeeesenaees 54 Accessing the Web Config Utility rerresinii seanna a a a N Ma eedaes 54 Changing a USB Connection to a Wi Fi COnnectio
54. above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 473 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C Sun Microsystems Inc Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems Inc and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a product or program deve
55. be locked by an administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this ii Setup nk Levels a Papers S O O Rework Stolus e pe ly 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary Select Universal Print Settings 5 Select PDL Print Configuration 59 You see a screen like this fy POL Print Configuration Connon Settings PO Menu 1 PPS Meru 6 Select one of the options shown above then select the settings you want to use 7 When you are finished press the ff home button to exit PDL Print Configuration Options Parent topic Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript Printing PDL Print Configuration Options Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing PDL Print Configuration Available Description option settings Common Settings Paper Size Various sizes Sets the default paper size for PCL or PostScript printing Paper Type Various paper Sets the default paper type for PCL or PostScript types printing Orientation Portrait Sets the default orientation for PCL or PostScript a ne Quality Draft Sets the quality for PCL or PostScript printing Best 60 PDL Print Configuration Available Description option setti
56. binary format may not print correctly Try creating the file in ASCII format instead In Windows the product cannot print binary data if it is connected to the computer using a USB cable Try selecting ASCII or TBCP as the Output Protocol setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties e In Windows select the appropriate substitution fonts on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties Ifthe printed colors are incorrect try adjusting the Color Mode setting on the Advanced tab of the printing software e If printing is slow try selecting Fast as the Print Quality setting on the Advanced tab of the printing software Parent topic Solving PostScript Printing Problems Related tasks Accessing Printer Properties Postscript Windows Accessing Printer Properties Postscript Windows You can access the printer properties to view and change product settings 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click the postscript driver for your product and select Printer properties e Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click the postscript driver for your product and select Printer properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound then right click the postscript driver for your product and select Properties 382 e Windows XP
57. code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The 452 executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a head
58. conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful 451 For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as pa
59. cutee todas esac esas bs ceevasaeteeseisteenenecheuerdereteereratitan deepened 306 Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen ceeccceeeecceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeesaaaeeseaeeeeeeeaaaeeeneaas 306 Pintig JPEG PIOUS 2 ches coche cca cca tee ay acccat Caen cohen tastes eaten r trea a a cok AE E Ee AEA AERE ERE 306 Printing MEF and PDF Files tnccsgustie ateect ecierectteda ead ta this ees iaoa E AANE EAA 308 Photo Adjustment Options Device Mode cc ccceeeseeeeeeeeeceeeenaeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeesneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaas 308 Print Setting Options Device MOde cceceeccceessceeeeesneeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeesesneeeeeeeaaaeeeneaes 309 Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive icici ere dec Secaedes ce ceset ce cote tasde ocean ceancecutsandoonteedeadeustenteeaatease 310 Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer c ccssceeesseeeeeeeeeseeeesneeeeees 310 Transferring Files from a USB Flash Drive to Your Computer ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeenens 311 Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance BOXeS susssusssnnneunsnunnnnunnunnnuunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunne nnna 313 Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status ceccccccescsceeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeesneeeeeeeaaeeeeenaas 313 Checking Cartridge Status on the LCD SCreen ecccceceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaaeeesesaeeeeeeaaeeees 313 Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with WiNdOW
60. dee terser rne eee 388 Slanted PHM OU sic etc ees cadens cee eea ties sbeitaoda E a A eet does dat eee 389 solving Print Quality ProblemS i ssccscensteetoteesctegererchetnnaes ebstiede tins bextavew ection akeantdecneeereelieianetee 389 White or Dark Lines in Printout et 222 324 ous secccecv nated ct eeds secenctaseads Setanta ceeratat eandentes theca 390 Bl rry r Smeared Printout senn ate otha e armen E 391 Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps tc xiq 2std ccacceceveccepeaders lace csdened aucmenebauteesaaGeeteateaneeeancaeeaune 392 Grainy Printo eera eer a e a Era Ra eaaa a a ei ERE aaant 393 INCOME CT COIS aise cee EETA AT A E E 394 Solving Scanning Problems eire aa eia eaa Oa ed eed eo eee ee aeaa OEE ERS 395 Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly sssssseessseeesnneessntrsserrnserrrnnernnnnrtnnnrernnnsserrnsene 395 Cannot Start EPSOMOCAM ate cee ae coe eee ee hae aa cat RN tanta eee Ue adnan Sean Ennn nenen 396 Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems 0 ccceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeaeeseeaaaeeseneeeseeeeaeeeeenaas 396 Image Consists of a Few Dots Only sis ceciecccestnsedinadt betes det igen teeeentaa ie aedeieas anaconda eendiaces 397 Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned IMageS cceeecccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeensaaeeneeaees 397 Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesegeeeeeseeeeeeee 398 Image is Distorted or Blurry gicmcse
61. depending on the file format Printsettings Available options Paper Source Various paper size Indicates the source that contains the paper size and type and type settings you want to print on Quality Standard Provides good quality for most prints Best sd Provides the highest quality for special prints Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the format you select 309 Print settings Available options a Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo layout lof sd Turns off automatic cropping Bidirectional On ssid Prints at normal speed Off sd Slows down printing to improve print quality Ons Select On to print PDF files double sided You can also offi select the Binding Margin and Dry Time if necessary Print Order Last ETT on Top Select the order for printing multi page TIFF or PDF files First First Page onTop on Top Parent topic Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive You can transfer files to and from a USB flash drive inserted into the USB port on the front of your product Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer Transferring Files from a USB Flash Drive to Your Computer Parent topic Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer Before you transfer files from a computer to a USB flash drive inserted into the USB port on the front of
62. discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary 440 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you have problems with this product and require technical or customer support please visit www epson com for more information This product is not intended to be repaired by the customer If you experience trouble connecting this equipment to a telephone line please contact Name Epson America Inc Address 3840 Kilroy Airport Way Long Beach CA 90806 U S A Telephone 562 981 3840 If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the instal
63. endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 474 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 1989 1991 Julianne Frances Haugh lt jockgrri austin rr com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Julianne F Haugh nor the names of its contributors may be used
64. exit Parent topic Using the Control Panel Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting The Operation Time Out setting causes the LCD screen to return to the Home screen after a few minutes of inactivity This feature is enabled by default but you can turn it off Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 2 Press the ff home button if necessary Select Setup 28 You see a screen like this ink Levels Maieben ince Paper Setup Print Status Sheet O Relwork Status Scroll down and select System Administration Select Common Settings Scroll down and select Operation Time Out Select Off Parent topic Using the Control Panel oP ot ae Product Parts Locations See these sections to identify the parts on your product Product Parts Front Product Parts Inside Product Parts Back Parent topic Product Basics 29 Product Parts Front Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code If you encounter any paper jams or errors use these codes to locate and correct the problem 1 ADF cover F 2 ADF input tray F 30 Oo ON OO A WwW 1 Edge guide ADF output tray Edge guides Front paper feed slot B2 Paper cassette 1 C1 Optional cassettes 2 to 4 C2 to C4 Optional cabinet Edge guides 31 Paper support Rear paper feed slot B1 Feeder guard O
65. if available and try scanning again Select the Unsharp Mask setting e Adjust the Auto Exposure setting e Increase the Resolution setting Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related topics Selecting Epson Scan Settings Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges If you are scanning a thick or warped original cover its edges with paper to block external light as you scan it Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Image is Too Dark If your scanned image is too dark try these solutions e Adjust these Epson Scan settings if available and try scanning again Auto Exposure 398 e Brightness e Histogram Adjustment e Check the brightness and contrast settings of your computer monitor Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related topics Selecting Epson Scan Settings Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image If an image from the back of a thin original appears in your scanned image place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and scan it again Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image You may see a ripple pattern called a moir in scanned images of printed documents This is caused by interference from differing pitches in the scanner s screen and your original s halftone screen To reduce this effect adjust these Epson Scan settings if available and try scanning again Select the Descreening setting
66. in your printer software e For best results use genuine Epson ink and paper Parent topic Solving Print Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Related references Available Epson Papers Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Managing Color OS X 394 Related topics Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Solving Scanning Problems Check these solutions if you have problems scanning with your product Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly Cannot Start Epson Scan Parent topic Solving Problems Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly If your scanning software does not operate correctly try these solutions e Make sure your computer has adequate memory and meets the system requirements for your operating system e Make sure your computer is not running in a power saving mode such as sleep or standby If so wake your system and restart your scanning software e If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall your scanning software try reinstalling it Note With OS X in addition to scanning with Image Capture you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for enhancing scanned images and provides an interface for TWAIN compliant OCR scanning softw
67. includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems Inc ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ECC cipher suite support in OpenSSL
68. is with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties including but not limited to correctness and or fitness for purpose The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2 8 17 August 2003 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation Software with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution and 3 Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time Each revision is distinguished by a version number You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION ITS CONTRIBUTORS OR THE AUTHOR S OR OWNER S OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMIT
69. is clean U 3 gt O gD Q S l D Q 7 a oO go J 3 Q i l IMMA 6 If there are no gaps click Finish If there are gaps or the pattern is faint clean the print head Parent topic Print Head Nozzle Check Related concepts Print Head Cleaning Related topics Loading Paper Print Head Cleaning If print quality has declined and the nozzle check pattern indicates clogged nozzles you can clean the print head Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility Parent topic Print Head Maintenance Related tasks Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges 333 Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product 1 Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product Press the ff home button if necessary Select Setup Select Maintenance arrow DN You see a screen like this Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Thick Paper Paper Guide Cleaning 6 Select Print Head Cleaning You see a screen like this Print Head Cleaning Olean The print fend bo correct mersing dots Press ER 7 Press the Color button to clean the print head 334 When the cleaning cycle is finished you see a message on the screen Caution Ne
70. mode LCD screen message Condition solution Printer error Turn the power off and Too many paper cassette units are installed Turn the power off and uninstall the extra units Cannot print because XX is out of order You can print from another paper source Maintenance rollers on XX are nearing the end of their service life Maintenance rollers on XX are at the end of their service life Turn the product off and then back on again If the error continues check for and remove any paper jams or protective materials from the product If the error is still displayed contact Epson for support You can install up to three optional paper cassette units Remove any extra units Turn the product off and then back on again Reinsert the indicated paper cassette The maintenance rollers need to be replaced periodically for optimal performance Paper may not feed correctly from the paper cassette when the maintenance roller is near the end of its service life Contact your dealer to replace the maintenance rollers Reset the maintenance roller counter and select the paper cassette for which you replaced the maintenance rollers You need to replace the following ink Replace the ink cartridge indicated on the LCD screen cartridge s 349 LCD screen message Condition solution Communication error Make sure the computer is connected to your product and the Epson Scan and Document Capture Pro software is installed corr
71. not be found because the destination information was uploaded to the server before sending the scanned data Select the destination again E An error occurred while sending the scanned data A communication error has occurred Make sure the product is connected to the computer or network correctly Make sure you have installed Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or security software An authentication error has occurred Make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected in the Where to Forward setting in the Setup menu A communication error has occurred It is also possible that a file with the same name is open or the file is a read only file Check the network connection make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected in the Where to Forward setting in the Setup menu close the duplicate file or disable read only protection 353 Condition solution 425 There is not enough storage space available in the forwarding destination folder Increase the storage space in the destination folder 428 The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist Make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected in the Where to Forward setting in the Setup menu Parent topic Solving Problems Related tasks Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen Selecting the Line Type Selecting Advanced
72. of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful 441 interference to radio or television reception However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help WARNING The connection of a non shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded equipment interface cable with this device If this equipment has more than one interface connector do not leave cables connected to unused interfaces Changes or modifications not expres
73. on the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window and check for the following e Check for any stalled or paused print jobs Cancel or unpause any jobs as necessary e Open the Printer menu and make sure the product is not offline 383 e Open the Printer menu and set the product as the default printer if necessary e In OS X select System Preferences from the Apple menu or Dock select Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners then double click your printer icon Check to see if any jobs are paused Cancel or unpause any jobs as necessary Ifthe user restriction feature Access Control is enabled a user ID and password is required to print If you do not know the user ID or password contact your administrator for assistance Note In OS X you may not be able to print if the user restriction feature is enabled Contact your administrator for assistance e If you are using AirPrint make sure AirPrint is enabled with the correct settings using Web Config Parent topic Solving Problems Printing from a Computer Related tasks Running a Product Check Using AirPrint Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar If you do not see your product icon in the Windows taskbar first try restarting your computer If that does not work try this solution 1 Do one of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt D
74. on the stored a i CR Function cR Selects the line feed command when printing with a CR LF driver from a specific operating system CR LF Paper Source Assign Makes the paper source select command compatible with HP LaserJet 4 Makes the paper source select command compatible with HP LaserJet 4000 5000 and 8000 Makes the paper source select command compatible with HP LaserJet 5S On Off Prints a sheet showing the status when errors occur during PostScript or PDF printing Selects the color mode for PostScript printing Image Protect On Off Disable to lower the print quality automatically if the printer s memory becomes full Binary On Off Enable when printing files that contain binary images available when the product is connected to the network Allows you to print binary images even if the driver is set to ASCII Text Detection On Off Converts a text file to a PostScript file when printing available when Printing Language is set to PS3 62 PDL Print Configuration Available Description option settings PDF Page Size Various sizes Selects the paper size when printing a PDF file If Auto is selected the paper size is determined based on the size of the first page Parent topic Selecting PDL Page Description Language Settings Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings You can select printer language and interface settings using the control panel on the product Note These settings can be locked by a
75. optional settings on the File Save Settings window in Epson Scan File Formats Bitmap bmp A standard image file format for most Windows programs JPEG jpg l l An image format that lets you highly compress image data However the higher the compression the lower the image quality The TIFF format is recommended when you need to modify or retouch your scanned image Multi TIFF tif A TIFF file format when multiple pages are saved to the same file allowing you to edit the images using a compatible program PDF pdf A document format that is readable by Windows and OS X systems using Adobe Reader Acrobat or other programs You can save multi page documents in one PDF file PICT pct A standard image file format for most OS X programs TIFF tif A file format created for exchanging data between many programs such as graphic and DTP software Optional Settings Overwrite any files with the same name Select to overwrite previous files with the same names 234 Show this dialog box before next scan Select to have the File Save Settings window appear automatically before you scan in certain Epson Scan modes Open image folder after scanning Select to have Windows Explorer or OS X Finder automatically open to the folder where your scanned image is saved after scanning Show Add Page dialog after scanning If you are scanning a multi page document using the PDF or Multi TIFF format select to display a pro
76. originally developed by SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC and contributed to the OpenSSL project Copyright 2005 Nokia All rights reserved The portions of the attached software Contribution is developed by Nokia Corporation and is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source license The Contribution originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of Nokia Corporation consists of the PSK Pre Shared Key ciphersuites support see RFC 4279 to OpenSSL No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in the OpenSSL open source license shall be deemed granted or received expressly by implication estoppel or otherwise No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any third party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights to make use of the Contribution THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND IN ADDITION TO THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE NOKIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY 466 LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE Portions of the attached software Contribution are developed by SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC and are contributed to the OpenSSL project Copyright c 2004 Richard Levitte lt richard levitte org gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modif
77. paper size and orientation settings from the print window Paper Size US Letter eq 8 50 by 11 00 inches Orientation Te 1 gt Note If you do not see these settings in the print window check for them in your application before printing They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu 1 Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting You can also select a custom setting to create a custom paper size 2 Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window Note You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the pop up menu and selecting a scaling option Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X 187 Selecting Print Layout Options PostScript Printer Software OS X You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the pop up menu on the print window Layout Pages per Sheet fhe J Border None Two Sided Off Reverse page orientation Flip horizontally Cancel Print To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet pop up menu To arrange the print order of the pages select a Layout Direction setting e To print borders around each page on the sheet select a line setting from th
78. paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting Select the Print Quality option that matches the print quality you want to use Adjust the Scaling setting to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage To utilize the Windows Image Color Management system set the ICM Method option to one of the ICM Handling options and select the ICM Intent setting you want to use Adjust the Pages Per Sheet Layout setting to change the order of multiple pages on a single sheet of paper when you have adjusted the Pages Per Sheet setting on the Layout tab Adjust the Booklet Binding Edge setting to change the orientation of your printed booklet 177 7 Expand the PostScript Options heading to access the advanced PostScript printer software features 8 Select any of the remaining Printer Features options to customize your printouts Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows Selecting Default Print Settings PostScript Printer Software Windows When you change your print settings in a program the changes apply only while you are printing in that program session If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs you can select new default print settings 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click your product name and select Print Preferences Windows 7 Cl
79. plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software Since few users ever read sources credits should appear in the documentation 4 This notice may not be removed or altered Copyright 2004 2005 2011 Howard Chu Symas Corp All rights reserved Copyright c 2009 2010 Martin Hedenfalk lt martin bzero se gt Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Portions Copyright c 1990 1996 Regents of the University of Michigan All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is
80. press one of the buttons Otherwise select Done 10 Press the ff home button to exit Your product should now be connected to the network Note If the WiFi connection symbol isn t lit or doesn t appear on the LCD screen you may have selected the wrong network name or entered the password incorrectly Repeat these steps to try again Parent topic Wi Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup Related references Status Icon Information Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Wi Fi Direct Mode Setup You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without requiring a wireless router or access point 1 Epson product 48 2 Computer with a wireless interface 3 Other wireless device Your product automatically selects one of these modes to communicate with your computer or device Access point mode If your product is not already connected to a wireless network it enters access point mode and the product itself acts as the network access point for up to 4 devices When operating in this mode your product displays an AP connection symbol on the LCD screen Peer to peer mode If your product is already connected to a wireless network it enters peer to peer mode and disconnects from any other networks This also disables any other product features requiring access to the Internet When operating in this mode your product displays a Direct or D connection symbol on the LCD screen Note
81. print job e To pause a print job click the D button next to the print job To resume a print job click the E button To pause printing for all queued print jobs click the large Pause button e To check ink status click the Settings icon then click the Supply Levels tab Parent topic Printing Your Document or Photo PostScript Printer Software OS X Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button If you need to cancel printing press the Stop button on your product Parent topic Printing from a Computer 191 Scanning You can scan original documents or photos and save them as digital files Starting a Scan Selecting Epson Scan Settings Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture Scanning Special Projects Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Windows Starting a Scan After placing your original documents or photos on your product for scanning start scanning using one of these methods Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Starting a Scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program Parent topic Scanning Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel You can scan an image to a memory device or to your computer using your product s control panel 1 Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or network Note Restart
82. product Doing so may cause fire Do not press too hard on the document table when placing originals Do not open the scanner section while the product is copying printing scanning or performing any other functions Be careful not to trap your fingers when closing the document cover or scanner Except as specifically explained in your documentation do not attempt to service the product yourself Unplug the product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions if the power cord or plug is damaged if liquid has entered the product if the product has been dropped or the case damaged if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in performance Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions Leave the ink cartridges installed Removing the cartridges can dehydrate the print head and may prevent the product from printing Before transporting the product make sure that the print head is in the home far right position and the ink cartridges are in place 437 When storing or transporting the product do not tilt it stand it on its side or turn it upside down otherwise ink may leak Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions LCD Screen Safety Instructions Wireless Connection Safety Instructions Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions Cabinet Safety Instructions Parent topic Notices Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions Keep ink cartridges o
83. product can receive faxes on the correct number of Double amp Triple rings Select All for phones lines that do not use this service Rings to Answer 1to9 Sets the number of rings before your product receives a fax If Receive Mode is set to Auto and an answering machine is connected to the product make sure this setting is set higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call Remote Receive C Lets you start receiving faxes using your phone instead of operating the product if the Receive Mode is set to Auto When you select On you must also Start Code set a Start Code If you are using a cordless handset with its base connected to the product you can start receiving the fax by entering the code using the handset Parent topic Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Output Settings Fax Set the output options you want to use for incoming faxes Note If you select Save to Inbox faxes are saved in the product s memory Delete faxes after viewing or printing them to prevent the memory from filling up Even if you select other options for saving faxes they may be saved temporarily in the product s memory 263 Setting Options Description O Auto Reduction Auto Rotation Collation Stack Print Suspend Time Other Settings Lets you create a folder for saving faxes on a memory device and select settings for forwarding faxes Save to Inbox Saves incoming faxes in the product s memory You ca
84. provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright c 2009 by Matthew Backes Symas Corp All rights reserved Portions Copyright 1995 2001 2003 IBM Corporation All rights reserved Portions Copyright c 1996 1998 by Internet Software Consortium Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL 482 DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1997 1998 1999 2001 Computing Research Labs New Mexico State University Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnish
85. redistribute it freely subject to the above disclaimer and the following restrictions 1 Redistributions of source code in whole or in part must retain the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions 2 Redistributions in binary form compiled executables and libraries must reproduce the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions in documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary including SFXWiz as part of a self extracting archive that is permitted without inclusion of this license as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled 3 Altered versions including but not limited to ports to new operating systems existing ports with new graphical interfaces versions with modified or added functionality and dynamic shared or static library versions not from Info ZIP must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source or if binaries compiled from the original source Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info ZIP releases including but not limited to labeling of the altered versions with the names Info ZIP or any variation thereof including but not limited to different capitalizations Pocket UnZip WiZ or MacZip without the explicit permission of Info ZIP S
86. representing the most solid printed pattern for each set on the LCD screen T a 1 3 4 e If you printed a horizontal alignment sheet select the number representing the pattern with the least amount of separation or overlap on the LCD screen mo m 3 1 Parent topic Print Head Alignment Related topics Loading Paper Aligning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility You can align the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer 1 Load afew sheets of plain paper in the product 2 Doone of the following Windows Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar e OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility e OS X 10 5 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax select your product and select Open Print Queue Select Utility 3 Select Print Head Alignment 339 4 Click Next then click Print to print an alignment sheet Note Do not cancel printing while you are printing a head alignment pattern You see a window like this Look at the alignment sheet Find the square without any visible bands in sets 21 through 24 Select the number that corresponds to that square from the list below for all sets Then dick
87. see a window like this one 6 Enter your sender information so that recipients can identify the origin of the fax Then click OK to save the sender information 293 You see a window like this ep oe Fax Number Because acts as a pause do not use it to punctuate phone numbers Orvision Tithe 7 Enter the recipient s name and fax number or select a recipient from the phonebook then click Next Note For detailed instructions on using the Epson FAX Utility click Help 8 Select a cover sheet and enter a subject and message then click Next 9 Click Send to transmit your fax Parent topic Sending Faxes Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility OS X You can send a fax from a OS X printing program using the FAX Utility You can fax up to 100 pages ata time including a cover sheet 1 Open the file you want to fax 294 Select the print command in your application Note You may need to select a print icon on your screen the Print option in the File menu or another command See your application s help utility for details Printer FAX B a Presets Standard g Copies 1 m Collated Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size US Letter 8 50 by 11 00 inches Orientation Te Te Select your product FAX option as the Printer setting If necessary click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the print window Select the numbe
88. settings 214 1 Inthe Preview window click the a Auto Locate icon to create a marquee dotted line on the preview image Welcome to EPSON A 2 24 in 10 76 in 2471 x 3228 pixels 22 82 MB 2 Do the following as necessary to work with the selected scan area e Ifthe marquee is correct continue with the next step To move the marquee click inside the scan area and drag the marquee where you want it 215 To resize the scan area place your cursor over the edge or corner of the marquee then click and drag the edges where you want them Hold down the Shift key as you resize the marquee to retain the same width height proportions To create additional marquees up to 50 if available click the Copy Marquee icon to copy the existing marquee and paste it on the preview image Note If you draw multiple marquees make sure you select the All button in the Preview window before you scan Otherwise only the area inside the currently selected marquee will be scanned To delete a marquee click the marquee then click the z Delete Marquee icon To rotate your original in your scan click one of the Rotate icons 3 Click inside each scan area and make any necessary settings in the Epson Scan window Parent topic Scanning in Office Mode Related concepts Image Preview Guidelines Scan Resolution Guidelines Related tasks Selecting Scan File Settings 216 Available Image Adjustments Office Mode
89. settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs 3 Click OK These settings are now the defaults selected for printing You can still change them as needed for printing in any program session Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows 165 Locking Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes The following settings can be locked e Watermark e Header footer e Color printing e 2 sided printing e Multi page printing All document settings 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties e Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound then right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties e Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties 2 Click the Optional Settings tab 166 You see this window Note You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group permissions in the Security tab 3 Click Driver Settings 167 You see this
90. static linking which are also provided in some distributions are not covered by the licence described above You should have received a separate licence with terms and conditions for these library files if you received the library files without a licence please contact nCipher Copyright c 2005 2006 Cryptocom LTD Written by Corinne Dive Reclus cdive baltimore com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 472 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www OpenSSL org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact licensing OpenSSL org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the
91. sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded Make sure your paper is not damp curled old or loaded incorrectly in your product e Align the print head e Clean the paper path Parent topic Solving Print Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Related references Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software 392 Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Cleaning the Paper Guide Related topics Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Loading Paper Grainy Printout If your printouts are grainy try these solutions Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product Select a higher print quality setting and turn off any high speed settings in your product software Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged Then clean the print head if necessary Align the print head You may need to increase the image resolution or print a smaller size see your software documentation Note Images from the Internet may be low resolution and not result in a high quality printout If you enlarged the image in an image editing program you need to increase the resolution setting to retain a high image quality Increase the resolution by the same amount you increased the image size For example if the resolution is 300 dpi dots per in
92. the Automatic Document Feeder F Automatic Document Feeder ADF Specifications Related tasks Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder Cleaning Your Product Solving Paper Problems Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product Paper Feeding Problems Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F Paper Ejection Problems Parent topic Solving Problems Paper Feeding Problems If you have problems feeding paper try these solutions e If paper does not feed for printing remove it from the rear feed slot or cassette Reload it then adjust the edge guides Make sure the paper stack is not above the tab on the edge guides inside the cassette or rear feed slot Be sure to insert the paper cassette all the way into your product e If multiple pages feed at once remove the paper fan the edges to separate the sheets and reload it Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets e Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product 365 e If paper jams when you print on both sides of the paper try loading fewer sheets e Make sure the paper size and pa
93. the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of t
94. the ink drying time you want to use when performing double sided printing Skip Blank Page On s Select On to skip printing of blank pages automatically C PDL Selects the settings for printing with PCL and PostScript Configuration Page Description Language drivers PS3Menu Parent topic Setting the Universal Print Settings Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes Follow these instructions to add the optional cabinet and paper cassette to your product If you are installing the optional cabinet install the cabinet under the bottom of the optional cassette unit first Installing the Optional Cabinet Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Parent topic Loading Paper 86 Installing the Optional Cabinet You can install the optional cabinet to provide mobility and extra storage space 1 Turn off the product and unplug the power cord and any connected cables Warning To avoid electric shock make sure you unplug the power cord Remove the cabinet from its packaging and remove any protective materials 3 Make sure you have all the items shown here 87 4 Place the cabinet on a flat surface and lock the front casters 5 Attach and secure the stands to the cabinet with the included screws Caution Make sure the stands are securely attached or the product may fall over 88 6 Remove the output tray and paper cassette from the product Ne ee Note If you installed the optional paper c
95. the machine readable source of the Package with your modifications by mail order 5 You may charge a distribution fee for any distribution of this Package If you offer support for this Package you may charge any fee you choose for that support You may not charge a license fee for the right to use this Package itself You may distribute this Package in aggregate with other possibly commercial and possibly nonfree programs as part of a larger possibly commercial and possibly nonfree software distribution and charge license fees for other parts of that software distribution provided that you do not advertise this Package as a product of your own If the Package includes an interpreter You may embed this Package s interpreter within an executable of yours by linking this shall be construed as a mere form of aggregation provided that the complete Standard Version of the interpreter is so embedded 6 The scripts and library files supplied as input to or produced as output from the programs of this Package do not automatically fall under the copyright of this Package but belong to whoever generated them and may be sold commercially and may be aggregated with this Package If such scripts or library files are aggregated with this Package via the so called undump or unexec methods of producing a binary executable image then distribution of such an image shall neither be construed as a distribution of this Package nor shall it fall under th
96. the next step 2 Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here sheet Parent topic Changing or Updating Network Connections Related tasks Uninstalling Product Software Windows Configuring Email Server Settings To use features such as scanning to email or forwarding faxes to email you need to configure the email server You can select settings for the email server using the control panel on the product Note These settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this ink Levels A Maintenance Paper Setup Frint Staus Sheet Helwork Stabus ly 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary 56 Select Wi Fi Network Settings Select Advanced Setup Select Email Server Select Server Settings You see a screen like this NO a fs 5 bom this ie Auhen Method o W POP before SHTP SMIP AUTH 8 Select one of the options shown above then select the settings you want to use Contact your internet service provider if necessary to confirm the authentication method for the email server 9 Select OK to save and select Done to exit 10 Select Connection Check to verify the connection to the email server Pare
97. to 30 sheets for manual 2 sided print jobs You can load up to 5 sheets for manual 2 sided print jobs Parent topic Loading Paper Available Epson Papers You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at Epson Supplies Central at epson com ink3 U S sales or epson ca Canadian sales You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller To find the nearest one call 800 GO EPSON 800 463 7766 Paper Type sie Partnumber Sheet count Epson Bright White Paper Letter 8 5 x 11 inches S041586 500 216 x 279 mm Epson Brochure amp Flyer Paper Letter 8 5 x 11 inches S042384 150 Matte Double sided 216 x 279 mm Epson Presentation Paper Matte Letter 8 5 x 11 inches S041062 100 216 x 279 mm Legal 8 5 x 14 inches S041067 100 216 x 356 mm 11 x 17 inches S041069 100 279 x 432 mm 13 x 19 inches S041070 100 330 x 483 mm Epson Premium Presentation 8 x 10 inches 203 x 254 mm S041467 paber ane Letter 8 5 x 11 inches S041257 50 216 x 279mm S042180 100 11 x 14 inches S041468 50 279 x 356 mm A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches S041260 50 297 x 420 mm 13 x 19 inches S041263 50 330 x 483 mm 77 a en ee en Paper Matte Double sided 216 x 279 mm Epson Photo Paper Glossy 4 x 6 inches 102 x 152mm S041809 pee Gee fo Letter 8 5 x 11 inches S041141 einen mm S041649 S041271 11 x 17 inches S041156 20 279 x 432 mm 13 x 19 inches S041143 20 330 x 483 mm Epson Premium Photo Paper 4 x 6 inches 1
98. to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The Clarified Artistic License Preamble The intent of this document is to state the conditions under which a Package may be copied such that the Copyright Holder maintains some semblance of artistic control over the development of the package while giving the users of the package the right to use and distribute the Package in a more or less customary fashion plus the right to make reasonable modifications Definitions 475 Package refers to the collection of files distributed by the Copyright Holder and derivatives of that collection of files created through textual modification Standard Version refers to suc
99. to optimize photos that include faces For this to work both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject s face If your photo includes a face with an intentional color cast such as a statue you may want to turn off Fix Photo to retain the special color effects Off No Color Adjustment Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your application software Parent topic Managing Color OS X Selecting Printing Preferences OS X You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product 1 Inthe Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences 2 Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies 3 Select Driver or Options 148 You see a screen like this General F Options Supply Levels Utility To take full advantage of your printer s options confirm that they are accurately shown here For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the printer s documentation Q Thick paper and envelopes Skip Blank Page Quiet Mode Permit temporary black printing High Speed Printing Warning Notifications S 9 9 S Q Q Establish bidirectional communication z Lower Cassette Cancel OK 4 Select any of the available printing preferences 5 Click OK Printing Preferences OS X Parent topic Printing with OS X
100. use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY 486 DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2004 2006 Emmanuel Dreyfus All rights reserved Redistribution and u
101. while setting up your product Product Does Not Turn On or Off Noise After Ink Installation Software Installation Problems Parent topic Solving Problems Product Does Not Turn On or Off If you cannot turn the product on or off try these solutions e If you cannot turn on your product make sure the power cord is securely connected and hold down the power button a little longer e If you cannot turn off your product hold the power button down a little longer If you still cannot turn off your product unplug the power cord To prevent the print head from drying out plug the power cord back in then turn your product on and off again using the power button Parent topic Solving Setup Problems Noise After Ink Installation If you hear noises from your product after installing ink check the following e The first time you install the ink cartridge the product must prime its print head Wait until priming finishes before you turn off the product or it may prime improperly and use excess ink the next time you turn it on e Ifthe product s print head stops moving or making noise and the charging process has not finished after approximately 5 minutes turn off your product Turn it back on and check to see if charging is still in progress If itis still in progress contact Epson for help 357 Parent topic Solving Setup Problems Software Installation Problems If you have problems while installing your product software try thes
102. your computer after installing the product software to enable scanning from the control panel Also make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or security software 2 Place your original on the product for scanning Note To scan a double sided document place it in the ADF and select the 2 Sided setting 192 3 Press the ff home button if necessary 4 Select Scan You see a screen like this Scan to s Hetwork Folder E TP a ee o Docunemi Capture Pro 5 Select one of the following Scan to options Email lets you send scanned files through a pre configured email server Network Folder FTP saves your scan file to a specified folder on a network Memory Device saves your scan file on a memory or USB device and lets you select the file format quality and other settings Cloud sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect Document Capture Pro allows you to scan over a network using your saved job settings in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Note You cannot use this option to scan an image to Document Capture or Document Capture Pro when your product is connected to your computer s USB port Computer WSD lets you manage network scanning in Windows 8 x Windows 7 or Windows Vista English only To use this feature you must first set up WSD Web Services for Devices on the computer 6 Select Preset to save your scan settings
103. your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here sheet Parent topic Changing or Updating Network Connections Changing a Wi Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection If you have already connected your product to your computer wirelessly you can change to a wired network connection if necessary 1 Disable your product s Wi Fi features Connect one end of an Ethernet network cable to the product s LAN port Connect the other end to any available LAN port on your router or access point Uninstall your product software Download and install your product software from the Epson website Follow the on screen instructions to install the software When you see the Select Your Connection screen select Wired network connection If you see a Select Setup Option screen select Setup printer for the first time oO aN oarw hr Continue following the rest of the on screen instructions Parent topic Changing or Updating Network Connections Related tasks Disabling Wi Fi Features Connecting to a New Wi Fi Router If you change the wireless router you have been using on your network you need to update your product s Wi Fi connection to the new router 55 Note If you switch to a 5 GHz wireless router set the router to operate in dual band 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz mode See your router documentation for instructions 1 Doone of the following Windows Uninstall your product software e OS X Go to
104. 02 x 152mm S041808 Glossy S041727 100 16 9 wide 4 x 7 1 inches S042109 102 x T mm 5 x 7 inches 127 x 178mm S041464 R 8 x 10 inches 203 x 254mm S041465 a Letter 8 5 x 11 ai 042183 11 x 14 inches S041466 279 x 356 mm 11 x 17 inches S041290 279 x 432 mm A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches S041288 tn x 420 mm 13 x 19 inches S041289 330 x 483 mm 78 Paper Type size Partnumber Sheet count Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper 4 x 6 inches 102 x 152mm S042181 60 Glossy S042174 100 5 x 7 inches 127 x 178mm S041945 8 x 10 inches 203 x 254mm 041946 Letter 8 5 x 11 inches 042182 25 216 x 279 mm S042175 50 Epson Premium Photo Paper 4 x 6 inches 102 x 152mm S041982 Semi gloss Letter 8 5 x 11 inches S041331 20 216 x 279 mm 13 x 19 inches S041327 20 330 x 483 mm Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Parent topic Loading Paper For this paper Select this paper Type or Media Type setting Plain paper Plain Paper Bright White Paper Epson Bright White Paper Letterhead paper Letterhead Recycled paper Recycled Color paper Envelopes Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi gloss Preprinted paper 79 For this paper Select this paper Type or Media Type setting Epson Presentation Paper Matte Premium Presentation Paper Matte Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Epson Premium Pres
105. 2 Condensed Medium Bold Italic Bold Univers Condensed Italic Incised 901 Medium Bold Italic Antique Olive Calligraphic 401 401 ss Marigold sd Flareserif 821 Medium Extra Bold Albertus Swiss 721 SWM Medium Bold Italic Bold Arial Italic Dutch 801 SWM Medium Bold Italic Bold Times New 3 Italic Swiss 721 SWA Medium Bold Oblique Helvetica 3 Bold Oblique Swiss 721 Narrow Medium Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow 3 SWA Bold Oblique Zapf Calligraphic 801 Medium Bold Italic Bold Palatino 3 SWA Italic Geometric 711 SWA Medium Bold Oblique ITC Avant Garde Gothic 3 Bold Italic Revival 711 SWA Light Demi Bold Light ITC Bookman 3 Italic Demi Bold Italic 426 Fontname Family HP equivalent Symbol set Century 702 SWA Medium Bold Italic Bold New Century Schoolbook Italic Dutch 801 SWA Medium Bold Italic Bold Times 3 Italic Chancery 801 Medium ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Sa Italic GE Cc Symbol SWM SWM I sd Symbot OE oe ee E Ding Dingsswa ITC Zapf Dingbats fe E E David BT Medium Bold bavia Zo O NarkisTamBT_ Medium Bold Nars Zo o O MiyamBT_ Medium Bold ttalic Miyam Fo o KoufiBT Medium Bold Koui de O NaskhBT_ Medium Bold Naskh de O RyadhBT Medium Bold Ryan l Bitmap Font Line Printer Symbol set 9 Parent topic Technical Specifications Symbol Sets Your product can access a variety of symbol sets Many of these symbol sets differ o
106. 355 Parent topic Solving Problems Related concepts Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment When to Uninstall Your Product Software Related references Where to Get Help Resetting Control Panel Defaults If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel you can reset them to their factory defaults You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance ca O Press the ft home button if necessary Select Setup Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary Scroll down and select Restore Default Settings You see a screen like this i Restore Default Settings l Wi Fi Hetek Settings Copy Settings Scan Settings Fix Settings Cear AN Data enid Settings ll Select one of these options e Wi Fi Network Settings Resets all network settings 356 e Copy Settings Resets all settings for copying e Scan Settings Resets all settings for scanning Fax Settings Resets all settings for faxing Clear All Data and Settings Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list You see a confirmation screen 6 Select Yes to reset the selected settings Select No if you want to cancel the operation Parent topic Solving Problems Solving Setup Problems Check these sections if you have problems
107. 64 Edition e Windows XP SP3 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2008R2 e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2003R2 e Windows Server 2003 Windows Server supports only the printer driver and Epson Scan any additional included software is not supported Note Visit Epson s support website at epson com support U S or epson ca support Canada for the latest in compatibility and drivers for your product Parent topic Technical Specifications OS X System Requirements To use your product and its software your Mac should use one of these operating systems e OS X 10 9 x e OS X 10 8 x e OS X 10 7 x e OS X 10 6 x e OS X 10 5 8 Note Visit Epson s support website at epson com support U S or epson ca support Canada for the latest in compatibility and drivers for your product Parent topic Technical Specifications Scanning Specifications Scanner type Flatbed color Photoelectric device CIS 411 Effective pixels Document size Scanning resolution Output resolution Image data Light source 14040 x 20400 pixels at 1200 dpi Maximum 11 7 x 17 inches 297 x 431 8 mm 1200 dpi main scan 2400 dpi sub scan 50 to 4800 7200 and 9600 dpi 50 to 4800 dpi in 1 dpi increments Color 10 bits per pixel per color internal 8 bits per pixel per color external Black and white 10 bits per pixel per color internal 1 to 8 bits per pixel per color external LED Parent topic Technical Specifications
108. 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties e Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound then right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties 169 Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties 2 Click the Optional Settings tab You see this window Cl remy 3 Network printer search oh Driver Settings Current Printer Information AAActter Cote Standard Resaiuten 600 Defauit of Printer Control Language EX PR Auto Oupiexer Installed ataled Confident Job Ma lt 3 Click Network printer search When you see the search results select Add found printers 170 You see a screen like this O Change connected peinter Refresh Select printers from the following Est and then click the Add to Printer Folder bution You can select multiple printers from the ist Found Printers Model Name IP Address WF Saes 192 168 1 124 WP Senses 192 168 1 131 Select a painter from the kst to set as the defaut painter Help 5 Select the printer or printers you want to add 6 Click Add to Printer Folder
109. A E ae cenceeg nate teak ecnaeuices 425 ASA G19 60 cs 21 C nnna ee ea e i a a e a a 427 NOCES is cxeccawesinaitananaracumuedavnasens cue uanisatencuue Esee asesan ARAPE ETOS aai araa Aare ecamsateaaaucuaewer sfuuesaamencenautanea sagucatunrnaias 436 General Product Safety INSIUCHONS s siciea ones fscs esnuaetecetoesedavgncdadaritdcennessoenedoled ceceumeceeuedaentineeenicortiedeed 436 Ink Cartridge Safety INStrUCtOns s ccccis paccisapecdceesscenssadedsdeeedseredansdeases vendita cal useteeenmedstaaneaes eadeeeedceee 438 LCD Screen Safety INSUCtONS mace caeca dda ceSancenjcuasateedecs etecrmenns icencoyaadnsiiaeantoens Re adnton cnucescteemnaeres 439 Wireless Connection Safety Instructions av uc0 sccneu dterast eieboes acento vonedcaain ee eeloeed arti oniyaees 439 Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions ccccceecceceeeeseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaaeeseseeeeeeeesaaeesneneees 439 Cabinet Safety INSTUCTONS sasie eeoa ete bate el a eta AGA ar er aeii 440 FCC Compliance Statement ci c cc cisce seed ssesseinueinokaedecepedsduieedetse digugaveoneds sone beayidateapesea tenn ieennecdeendd 440 Software NOTCE eh gata ns ce elec og anecdotes duieure cece udel ce sah eE Sauna anton Esee LEEA e EERE REA OANRET 443 WVAGSINAIKS iniaeeaa t aeaa I a aE Ae a aed a aee aA T in 491 COP WOME INOUCE fee EA E E E E E ET A E E E E E E 491 lib TIFF Software Acknowledgment ss sssssrssesereesesrrerenntssttrsssrrrnsttrnnetnnntttnnnrssntnnsstrnssrernnenn nne 492
110. Appear in OS X Printer Window Cannot Print Over a Network Cannot Scan Over a Network Parent topic Solving Problems 358 Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point try these solutions If you are connecting the product via Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS and the Wi Fi icon on your product s LCD is not lit or does not appear make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router Make sure to place your product within contact range of your 2 4GHz router or access point Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven 2 4 GHz cordless phone or large metal object such as a filing cabinet Note If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router set the router to operate in dual band 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz mode See your router documentation for instructions Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or another device You may need to disable the firewall and any anti virus software on your wireless router or access point Check to see if access restrictions such as MAC address filtering are set on the router or access point If access restrictions are set add your product s MAC address to your router s address list To obtain your product s MAC address print a network status sheet Then follow the instructi
111. Basic Print Settings OS X Selecting Page Setup Settings OS X Selecting Print Layout Options OS X Selecting Double sided Printing Settings OS X Managing Color OS X Selecting Printing Preferences OS X Printing Your Document or Photo OS X Parent topic Printing from a Computer Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print 1 2 Open a photo or document for printing Select the print command in your application Note You may need to select a print icon on your screen the Print option in the File menu or another command See your application s help utility for details Select your product as the Printer setting Printer EPSON Presets Default Settings If necessary click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the print window 137 You see the expanded printer settings window for your product Printer EPSON Presets Default Settings Copies m Pages AII From 1 to 1 Paper Size US Letter 8 50 by 11 00 inches ray Orientation Te Te Preview vw Auto Rotate Scale 100 Scale to Fit Copies per page 1 Cancel o Print Note The print window may look different depending on the version of OS X and the application you are using Select the Copies and Pages settings as necessary Note If you do not see these settings in the print window check f
112. ED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealing in this Software without specific written prior permission Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation Copyright 1999 2012 The OpenLDAP Foundation Redwood City California USA All Rights Reserved Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted Copyright C 2000 Pierangelo Masarati lt ando sys net it gt All rights reserved 481 Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system and to alter it and redistribute it subject to the following restrictions 1 The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this software no matter how awful even if they arise from flaws in it 2 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented either by explicit claim or by omission Since few users ever read sources credits should appear in the documentation 3 Altered versions must be
113. EPSON EXCEED YOUR VISION WF 8590 User s Guide Contents WF 8590 Users Cite ccc isso alec a ee cee eee ee Aa eae an eda cades sda ees 15 Product BASICS visicsrccasedesuctesnasaserecensacutaandeecauaianenenieaeennava tame us SO AARAA venuedssanraraccantund qteaauuesiecvaeraushese tenseuteaies 16 Wsingthe Control Panel issin naana a A EAEE Eaa EEN EAE SE EA NE AEREE 16 Control Panel B tt ns and Lights isere mea a e al EA A E G 17 Status Icon Information s3 3 6 2 c5 sautestensS aeceeaencceseadess cexxeeeees aueceexaeaaied na icetrutatandeasancearteeumeieess een 18 Status Butt nlnformatoNt sas a a ean ea reco eae ea ice eae eee 19 Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel cceccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeteneeeee 20 Entering Characters on the LCD SCree n eeecccceecsceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeneneeeeeeeaaaeennas 22 Using PROSO ES perie earita E h pacin al nad E E EKAA EEA A TA 22 Setting User Feature Restrictions Access Control cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeenenneeees 24 Changing LCD Screen LA nqQua ge taicri tid iocctaten cnn ceatelieenestonsreameea etl dee Nendeedte oeetne ee 25 Adjusting Control Panel SOUNGS acct sticcs facet ce adssies paGieeag Gees dena necncduacee nea sersieecucldentPaadecbaaieusencote 26 Adjusting the Screen BONING SS su accessed eceyzaei ceedSser deena sche peace taeedh ban deunadddh yisescbes seca dedetasleeteesteeieenste 27 Turning Off t
114. ERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Copyright c 2005 JSON org 479 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software The Software shall be used for Good not Evil THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 1991 2 RSA Data Security Inc Created 1991 All rights res
115. Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a
116. F input tray and carefully remove any jammed pages 9 Lower the ADF input tray 10 Reload your originals Caution Make sure you do not load the ADF beyond its capacity for your paper size Also make sure your originals are not bent folded or curled and do not have tape staples or other materials that could obstruct the feeder 11 Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages If you still see a paper jam message check the other paper jam solutions Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit 380 Paper Ejection Problems If you have problems with paper ejecting properly try these solutions If paper does not eject fully you may have set the wrong paper size Cancel printing to eject the paper Select the correct paper size when you reprint e If paper is wrinkled when it ejects it may be damp or too thin Load new paper and be sure to select the correct paper type setting when you reprint Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Related tasks Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button Related t
117. FTP 5 Doone of the following e To create a contact for scanning to email select Scan to Email To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP select Scan to Network Folder FTP 6 Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding 7 Select the Name field use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name up to 30 characters and press l 201 8 Select the Index Word field use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for an entry up to 30 characters and press E This field is optional 9 Doone of the following For an email contact select the Email address field use the displayed keyboard to enter the address and press Hj For a network folder or FTP location select the Communication Mode field and select Network Folder SMB or FTP Then select the Location field use the displayed keyboard to enter the location and press Enter other information if necessary 10 Select Save Note If you need to edit or delete scanning contacts the procedures are the same as for fax contacts Parent topic Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Editing or Deleting a Contact Related topics Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs You can view change or add available default scan settings when you scan using the Document Capture Pro option on the product control
118. Fax Settings Setting User Feature Restrictions Access Control Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Related topics Sending Faxes Wi Fi or Wired Networking Running a Product Check Running a product check helps you determine if your product is operating properly 1 arrow rh Disconnect any interface cables connected to your product Load plain paper in the product Press the ff home button if necessary Select Setup Select Maintenance 354 You see a screen like this Print Head Hogzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment hick Paper I Paper Guide Cleaning Select Print Head Nozzle Check You see a screen like this Ej Print Head Hoge Check Load Letier Ad site Plein Paper to print novzle check pattem Press A Press the Color button The nozzle pattern prints Do one of the following depending on the results of the product check e Ifthe page prints and the nozzle check pattern is complete the product is operating properly Any operation problem you may have could be caused by your computer cable software or selected settings Check the other solutions in this book or try uninstalling and reinstalling your printer software Ifthe page prints but the nozzle check pattern has gaps clean or align the print head e Ifthe page does not print the product may have a problem Check the other solutions in this manual If they do not work contact Epson
119. IBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2004 SuSE Linux AG Nuernberg Germany Contributed by Michal Ludvig lt mludvig suse cz gt SUSE Labs All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 488 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISI
120. LIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2011 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission p
121. Maintenance Box 328 Adjusting Print Quality If your print quality declines you may need to run a utility to clean or align the print head Note When using the PostScript PS3 printer software with the product you can clean and align the print head and run a nozzle check by using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software To download the standard Epson printer software go to epson com support wf8590 If running these utilities does not solve the problem you may need to replace the ink cartridges Print Head Maintenance Print Head Alignment Cleaning the Paper Guide Print Head Maintenance If your printouts become too light or you see dark or light bands across them you may need to clean the print head nozzles Cleaning uses ink so clean the nozzles only if print quality declines You can check for clogged nozzles before you clean them so you don t clean them unnecessarily Note You cannot clean the print head if an ink cartridge is expended and may not be able to clean it when a cartridge is low You must replace the cartridge first Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Parent topic Adjusting Print Quality Related topics Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Print Head Nozzle Check You can print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
122. Mode Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings Related concepts Image Preview Guidelines Scan Resolution Guidelines Related tasks Scanning in Office Mode Selecting Scan File Settings Available Document Source Settings Professional Mode You can select these Document Source options in Epson Scan Professional Mode Scanner Glass Selects the scanner glass as the location where the originals are placed on your product for scanning ADF Single sided Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your product for single sided scanning ADF Double sided Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your product for double sided scanning Parent topic Scanning in Professional Mode Available Image Types Professional Mode You can select these Image Type options in Epson Scan Professional Mode 24 bit Color Select this setting for color photos Color Smoothing Select this setting for color graphic images such as charts or graphs 8 bit Grayscale Select this setting for black and white photos Black amp White Select this setting for black text documents or line art 221 Parent topic Scanning in Professional Mode Selecting a Scan Area Professional Mode You can select a specific area in your preview image to include in your scanned image You can select the entire image area or a portion of it You can even select multiple scan areas to cr
123. NG IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2004 SuSE Linux AG Nuernberg Germany Contributed by Michal Ludvig lt mludvig suse cz gt SUSE Labs All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT
124. Note Presets can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 193 7 Do any ofthe following as necessary e Select the email address location destination or computer as necessary e Select Contacts to choose an email address or network folder e Select Format to choose the file format e Select Settings to display additional scanning options Scanning to Email Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server Control Panel Scanning Options Creating Contacts for Scanning Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs Parent topic Starting a Scan Related tasks Using Epson Scan to Cloud Using Presets Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Scanning to Email You can scan an image and email the scanned file using your product s control panel You need to have a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email You can either enter the email address directly on the product s control panel or select an address from the Contacts list Make sure the date and time are set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate Note You can also use the Scan to Document Capture Pro function to scan and email the scanned file 1 Place your original on the product for scanning Note To scan a double sided document place it in the ADF and select the 2 Sided setting Press the ff home button if necessary Select Scan
125. PS3 Printer Software Windows Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button Printing with Windows You can print with your product using any Windows printing program as described in these sections Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Double sided Printing Settings Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting a Printing Preset Windows Selecting Extended Settings Windows Printing Your Document or Photo Windows Locking Printer Settings Windows Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Selecting Default Print Settings Windows Changing Automatic Update Options Parent topic Printing from a Computer Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print 112 1 Open a photo or document for printing 2 Select the print command in your application Note You may need to select a print icon on your screen the Print option in the File menu or another command See your application s help utility for details 3 If necessary select your product name as the printer you want to use Note You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings You see the Main tab of your printer settings window Auto Select Letter 8 1 2 x 11 S Portat Landscape Pain Paper Bright White Paper Standard Color O Stacdk Grayscale Of
126. Panel Editing or Deleting a Contact You can edit or delete any of the contacts on your list 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Fax 272 You see a screen like this LSE Enter a Fae Humber Contacts History Oni Haak Sr Preset 3 Select Contacts Enter the administrator password if necessary Select the contact you want to edit or delete You see a screen like this Details 5 Doone of the following e To delete the contact select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen e To edit the contact select Edit select the item you want to change enter the correct information and select When you are finished editing select Save Parent topic Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel Creating a Contact Group You can create a group of contacts so that you can easily send faxes to multiple recipients 273 Note You can create up to 100 contacts and contact groups combined Press the fff home button if necessary 2 Select Fax You see a screen like this P Enter a fae Murer e Resolution 3 Censity Coniacts pe A a Document k tg o a Om Henk Oe Preview whe Preset 3 Select Contacts Enter the administrator password if necessary 4 Select Menu You see a screen like this Add Entry Ce mage OO OEe Pimes o Print Contacts Note You can print your list of contacts and groups if necessary 5 Select Add Group 6 Select the n
127. RAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 447 END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY
128. S cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeees 314 Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with OS X cccccccscssseeeceeeeseseeseeeeeeeeessenaes 317 Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance BOX cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeessnaeeeeeeneeees 319 Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part NUMDETS cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeetenaees 319 Removing and Installing Ink CartridQeS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeecaaeeeseceeeeeeeeaaeeeenceeeeeeneaeeees 320 Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeneeeees 323 Printing with Expended Color Cartridges WiNdOWS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeeteaeeteeaes 323 Printing with Expended Color Cartridges OS X ecccccesssceeeeseeeceeeeeeceesesneneeeeeaaeeeeensaeeeeeneenaeeeaas 324 Conserving Low Black Ink with WiNGOWS c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeeeeceaeeeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeeteneeeeeesnaaeeeenees 326 Replacing the Maintenance BOK 223 nice el cevand ie toast acts veh ence eee gal ace acadaae debe aleus dae etude ee teased Mt age 326 Adjusting Print UU IEY occ t recae setenv ede sced acti vases deccetecsecxecud ideas tik ecules beceuueessscusstaedetvasetuucbeldegesivussseceddeteastebes 329 Print Head Maintenance vce ens ch conse tende eep aa ctenteeguentce cae van acace ae aucetamtdydenassalmctentenss tecenmtanscenemseteapiaasd 329 PrintHead Nozzle Checkere
129. S BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2000 Broadcom Corporation This file is Copyright 1998 2000 nCipher Corporation Limited Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with opr without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 471 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution IN NO EVENT SHALL NCIPHER CORPORATION LIMITED NCIPHER AND OR ANY OTHER AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS OF THIS FILE BE LIABLE for any damages arising directly or indirectly from this file its use or this licence Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing all liability shall be excluded for direct indirect special incidental consequential or other damages or any loss of profits business revenue goodwill or anticip
130. SE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE This is version 2007 Mar 4 of the Info ZIP license The definitive version of this document should be available at ftp ftp info zip org pub infozip license html indefinitely and a copy at http www info zip org pub infozip license html Copyright 1990 2007 Info ZIP All rights reserved For the purposes of this copyright and license Info ZIP is defined as the following set of individuals Mark Adler John Bush Karl Davis Harald Denker Jean Michel Dubois Jean loup Gailly Hunter Goatley Ed Gordon lan Gorman Chris Herborth Dirk Haase Greg Hartwig Robert Heath Jonathan Hudson Paul Kienitz David Kirschbaum Johnny Lee Onno van der Linden Igor Mandrichenko Steve P Miller Sergio Monesi Keith Owens George Petrov Greg Roelofs Kai Uwe Rommel Steve Salisbury Dave Smith Steven M Schweda Christian Spieler Cosmin Truta Antoine Verheijen Paul von Behren Rich Wales Mike White This software is provided as is without warranty of any kind express or implied In no event shall Info ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software 478 Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and
131. STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 489 Copyright C 1995 1996 1997 and 1998 WIDE Project Copyright C 2008 Timo Teras All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
132. SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2005 Nokia All rights reserved The portions of the attached software Contribution is developed by Nokia Corporation and is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source license The Contribution originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of Nokia Corporation consists of the PSK Pre Shared Key ciphersuites support see RFC 4279 to OpenSSL No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in the OpenSSL open source license shall be deemed granted or received expressly by implication estoppel or otherwise No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any third party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights to make use of the Contribution THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND IN ADDITION TO THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE NOKIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE Copyright C 2006 Network Resonance Inc Copyright C 2011 RTFM Inc Copyright 2001 Baltimore Technologies Ltd THIS FILE IS PROVIDED BY BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIE
133. Sections 1 through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below 457 Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Wor
134. T OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2011 Google Inc Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License 469 you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http Awww apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License Created 960901 by Gertjan van Oosten gertjan West NL West Consulting B V Code adapted from lt URL http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb LN 97193 gt the original copyright message is C Copyright Microsoft Corp 1993 All rights reserved You have a royalty free right to use modify reproduce and distribute the Sample Files and or any modified version in any way you find useful provided that you agree that Microsoft has no warranty obligations or liability for any Sample Application Files which are modified Copyright c 2004 Kungliga Tekniska H gskolan
135. THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2005 International Business Machines Corporation Copyright c 2005 by Trusted Computer Solutions Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES 490 INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF
136. The selected printer or printers appear in the lower section of the screen 7 Click OK Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows 171 Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows You can print with the PostScript PS3 printer software using any Windows printing program as described in these sections Installing the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options PostScript Printer Software Windows Selecting Default Print Settings PostScript Printer Software Windows Parent topic Printing from a Computer Installing the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows If you did not install the standard Epson printer software you need to install the PostScript PS3 printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer Note Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before installing the printer software 1 Download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package PS3 PostScript from epson com support wf8590 Double click the downloaded package Click OK Click Accept Click Install Click Next and follow the on screen instructions Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows
137. To disconnect a peer to peer mode connection release the connection to your product from your computer or other device Your product will reconnect to the previously used network Enabling Wi Fi Direct Mode Parent topic Wi Fi or Wired Networking Related references Status Icon Information Enabling Wi Fi Direct Mode You can enable Wi Fi Direct mode to allow direct communication between your product and computer or other devices without a wireless router or access point 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Press F 3 Select Wi Fi Setup 49 You see a screen like this I Wie Fi Setup WEF Setup Wira Push Button Setup GAES FIH Code Setup WES fy Scroll down and select Wi Fi Direct Setup Select Connection Setup Select Change Password and select Yes Note If you have already connected devices or computers to your product via Wi Fi Direct they are disconnected when you change the password Enter your new Wi Fi Direct password Pa Note Your password must be at least 8 and no more than 22 characters long e Press La or Le to move the cursor e Press Ez to change the case of letters 50 11 e Press lt a to delete the previous character e Press to enter numbers and symbols Press L Ito enter a space Press E when you finish entering your password You see a screen like this a Wi Fi rect Setup ing via Wi Fi Direct he Wi Fi Wi Fi Cancel Scroll down
138. USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Parent topic Notices Trademarks EPSON and Supplies Central are registered trademarks EPSON Exceed Your Vision is a registered logomark and Epson Connect is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation Epson Store is a service mark of Epson America Inc Epson iPrint and Remote Print are trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation Apple iPad iPhone iPod touch Mac and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Google is a registered trademark and Android Chromebook Google Chrome Google Cloud Print and Google Drive are trademarks of Google Inc Wi Fi Direct is a registered trademark of Wi Fi Alliance General Notice Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks EPSON EXCEED YOUR VISION Parent topic Notices Copyright Notice All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or other
139. a product or program developed by the user SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems Inc to assist in its use correction modification or enhancement SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF In no event will Sun Microsystems Inc be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special indirect and consequential damages even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages Sun Microsystems Inc 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View California 94043 467 Generic DES driver interface Keep this file hardware independent Copyright c 1986 by Sun Microsystems Inc Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems Inc ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The Elliptic Curve Public Key Crypto Library ECC Code included herein is developed by SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC and is contributed to the OpenSSL project The ECC Code is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source license provided below In addition Sun covenants to all licensees who provide a reciprocal covenant with respect to their own patents if any not to sue under current and future patent claims necessarily infringed by
140. abled 405 e Make sure your drive is compatible with the product e Make sure the files on your drive are in the correct format Parent topic Solving USB Flash Drive Problems Related references Interface Specifications USB Device Photo File Specifications Related tasks Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer Related topics Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen Cannot Save Files on a USB Flash Drive If you cannot save files on a USB flash drive inserted in your product try these solutions e To save faxes on a USB flash drive you need to create a folder in the Fax Output settings on the product control panel Make sure the drive is not write protected Make sure the drive has enough available space e Make sure memory devices are enabled Make sure the drive is compatible with the product Parent topic Solving USB Flash Drive Problems Related references Interface Specifications Output Settings Fax Related tasks Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Flash Drive If you have problems transferring files to or from a USB flash drive inserted in your product try these solutions e Make sure your flash drive is compatible with the product e Make sure your product is securely connected to your computer 406 e Make sure that the file sharing setting for your product is set correctly Parent topic Solving USB Flash Dr
141. ace your original facedown on the scanner glass with the top facing into the corner Slide the original to the edges of the indicated corner sid Note You can place multiple originals on the scanner glass Just make sure they are at least 0 8 inch 20 mm away from each other 3 Close the document cover gently to keep your original in place Parent topic Placing Originals on the Product 104 Related topics Copying Scanning Faxing Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder You can place multi page original documents in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF You can also use the ADF to scan both sides of a 2 sided document Make sure the originals meet the Automatic Document Feeder specifications before loading them Caution Make sure your originals are not creased or folded and do not contain holes staples tape or other materials that could obstruct the feeder 1 Slide the ADF edge guide outward 105 2 Fan your stack of originals and tap them gently on a flat surface to even the edges gt 3 Insert the originals into the ADF faceup and top edge first The ADF icon on the control panel lights up 106 4 Slide the ADF edge guide against the originals but not too tightly Parent topic Placing Originals on the Product Related references Automatic Document Feeder ADF Specifications Related topics Copying Scanning Faxing 107 Copying See the information her
142. ad Alignment Print Queue Ri Printer and Option Informason Ay Softmare Update 4 Select the language you want to use as the Language setting 5 Click OK to close the printer software window The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them Parent topic Selecting Default Print Settings Windows Changing Automatic Update Options Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software You can change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature 135 1 Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar 2 Select Software Update Settings You see this window Check for Software Updates on the Internet Check every 2 weeks 3 Doone of the following To change how often the software checks for updates select a setting in the Check every menu e To disable the automatic update feature select the Never option 4 Click OK to exit Note If you choose to disable the automatic update feature you can check for updates manually Parent topic Printing with Windows Related tasks Checking for Software Updates Printing with OS X You can print with your product using any OS X printing program as described in these sections Note If you have an Internet connection it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software on Epson s support website 136 Selecting
143. aeeeseeeaaeeeeseaaeeseeneaeeeees 404 Received Fax Quality is Poor ssieccsleccesesiysidecgs louie eteecesass olan sastvedcbealcetassccedeed shad eseuncs eletenenenticad 405 Received Fax is Not Printed eissis aotan i atte edt E R E iis 405 Solving USB Flash Drive ProblemS iia cxccutes sexe Aeracegtuaneteicenrotdedndeteamecechatg pate dxeerdes text banceectuaragendene 405 Cannot View or Print from a USB Flasit Driv Gs sesueisvictgerhagnaesnttnnd ee hevaissintoatdeareluutt acumen eed 405 Cannot Save Files on a USB Flash Drive 00 cccceeeccceeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeneaaeaeeeeeaaeeeeensaeeeeeeaaaaeeess 406 Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Flash Drive cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees 406 When to Uninstall Your Product Software cs s sc cctsceiecesssrtnaseiciveinatietinenayie ead epee 407 Uninstalling Product Software WiINGOWS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeneeeeestnaaeeeeneaes 407 Uninstalling Product Software OS X stetecideet ioe need Sensaruecnoheed ee cama ita saela noha Ne cedaeiiend 408 WWITGTESTO GSTS ie EE van teeta cites aetna ta eece E EE E tac aiees 409 Technical Spechlticatlons ossis aeaa Bate ee ee 410 Windows System Requirements c 2 cccsickass aces eeecece ented aeensinde a vbw est asada Meee antaeepnaniecead eas 410 OS X System ACCUIMGMISIIS ac Ad ce eee ce ee aed ee eae eal he oes cad eee ear dace na eenen 411 Scanning Specifications sinansa a a a a tn a ee a a as
144. ails of your original and how you want it scanned as the Image Type setting Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan Click the Preview button Epson Scan previews your original and displays the result in a separate Preview window If you are using the ADF reinsert your original into the ADF If desired select the area in your preview image that you want to scan scan area Note You cannot select a scan area if you chose ADF Double sided as the Document Source setting Select any of the image adjustment settings you want to use Before making adjustments click the image or scan area in the Preview window If you want to reduce or enlarge your image as you scan select the Target Size setting you want to use Note You cannot select a target size if you chose ADF Double sided as the Document Source setting Click Scan You see the File Save Settings window Change any of the necessary file save settings and click OK Epson Scan scans your original and saves the file in the selected folder or opens it in your scanning program If the file was saved directly to your computer you see the file in the Windows Explorer or OS X Finder where you can view and print the image if desired Available Document Source Settings Professional Mode 220 Available Image Types Professional Mode Selecting a Scan Area Professional Mode Available Image Adjustments Professional Mode Selecting a Scan Size Professional
145. ake copies in any form for internal distribution and to freely use the information supplied in the creation of products supporting the Unicode TM Standard The files in the Unicode Character Database can be redistributed to third parties or other organizations whether for profit or not as long as this notice and the disclaimer notice are retained Information can be extracted from these files and used in documentation or programs as long as there is an accompanying notice indicating the source 483 Portions Copyright C 1999 2000 Novell Inc All Rights Reserved THIS WORK IS SUBJECT TO U S AND INTERNATIONAL COPYRIGHT LAWS AND TREATIES USE MODIFICATION AND REDISTRIBUTION OF THIS WORK IS SUBJECT TO VERSION 2 0 1 OF THE OPENLDAP PUBLIC LICENSE A COPY OF WHICH IS AVAILABLE AT HTTP WWW OPENLDAP ORG LICENSE HTML OR IN THE FILE LICENSE IN THE TOP LEVEL DIRECTORY OF THE DISTRIBUTION ANY USE OR EXPLOITATION OF THIS WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED IN VERSION 2 0 1 OF THE OPENLDAP PUBLIC LICENSE OR OTHER PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT FROM NOVELL COULD SUBJECT THE PERPETRATOR TO CRIMINAL AND CIVIL LIABILITY Copyright 1999 Juan C Gomez All rights reserved This software is not subject to any license of Silicon Graphics Inc or Purdue University Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted without restriction or fee of any kind as long as this notice is preserved Portions Copyright c 1987 Regents of the University of Cali
146. al Projects Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Windows If Access Control is enabled on the product a user ID and password may be required to scan You can enter the user ID and password in Epson Scan Settings Note If you do not know the user ID or password contact your administrator for assistance 1 Do one of the following to access Epson Scan Settings Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan Settings Windows other versions Click or Start gt All Programs or Programs gt EPSON gt EPSON Scan gt EPSON Scan Settings Click the Access Control button Enter your user name and password 241 4 Click OK Parent topic Scanning 242 Faxing See these sections to fax using your product Note This product allows you to store names telephone numbers and fax data in its memory even when the power is turned off Make sure you restore all of the default settings if you give away or dispose of the product This will erase all of your network settings and fax data Note When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript PS3 printer software with the product you can fax using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software To download the standard Epson printer software go to epson com support wf8590 Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Setting Up Fax Features Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Sending Faxes
147. al liability END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX How to apply the Apache License to your work To apply the Apache License to your work attach the following boilerplate notice with the fields enclosed by brackets replaced with your own identifying information Don t include the brackets The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third party archives Copyright yyyy name of copyright owner Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http Awww apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License Copyright c 2003 2004 Apple Computer Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following di
148. al or group dial entries 8 When you are finished click the Ga icon to save the entries to your product s memory Parent topic Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Related topics Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel 280 Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility OS X You can set up your speed dial and group dial lists using the FAX Utility The utility also lets you import fax numbers from the MacAddress Book and back up fax numbers to your product s memory Note You can create up to 60 speed dial and group dial entries combined 1 Do one of the following e OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility e OS X 10 5 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax select your product and select Open Print Queue Select Utility 2 Double click FAX Utility if necessary You see this window 2 0 0 FAX Utility Printer FAX EPSON Tool nm lt t gt a Fax Settings 7 bS j 3 Select your FAX product in the Printer list 4 Select Speed Dial Group Dial List 281 You see this window eoo Speed Dial Group Dial List FAX EPSON o Hig Entry Nu Name Crowp Name index Word fax Number 5 Toaddan entry double clic
149. al settings click the Options button to select them Choose any of the optional settings you want to use by selecting their checkboxes Click OK If you selected PDF or Multi TIFF as the Type setting you see this window after Epson Scan scans your document Scanning complete 4 Do you want to continue scanning and add more pages Select Edit Page to finish scanning and edit the pages before saving the file Select Save File to finish scanning and save the file without editing the pages seer Choose one of the following options e If you are scanning only one page click Save File e If you need to scan additional pages in a document click Add page Place additional pages on the product for scanning click Scan and repeat until you have scanned all the pages When you are finished click Save File 233 e If you need to delete or reorder the scanned pages click Edit page Delete or reorder the pages using the icons that appear on the bottom of the editing window When you are finished click OK Note If you installed an OCR Optical Character Recognition program you may see a screen indicating the program is converting your page to text Wait until the program re scans the page and close the program if necessary Available Scanned File Types and Optional Settings Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings Available Scanned File Types and Optional Settings You can select from a variety of scanned file types and
150. an and save the scanned image to a file Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan under EPSON or EPSON Software Windows other versions Click or Start and select All Programs or Programs Select EPSON or EPSON Software and click EPSON Scan e OS X Open the Applications folder open the Epson Software folder and double click the EPSON Scan icon Note With OS X in addition to scanning with Image Capture you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for enhancing scanned images and provides an interface for TWAIN compliant OCR 206 scanning software To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads You see an Epson Scan window like this EPSON Scan ae Curent Setting v Save Delete Letter 8 5 x 11 in None Otientation i C Conget Document Skew Botate o Image Type Resolution Parent topic Starting a Scan 207 Related tasks Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Windows Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program You can start Epson Scan from a scanning program to select scan settings scan and open the scanned image in the program Note With OS X in addition to scanning with Image Capture you can download and install
151. an Modes Epson Scan provides a choice of scan modes with different levels of control over your settings Office Mode You can quickly scan text documents and adjust them on a preview screen You can also select various image adjustment options and preview your scanned image Professional Mode You can manually customize all available settings and preview and size your scanned image Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings 210 Selecting the Scan Mode Select the Epson Scan mode you want to use from the Mode box in the upper right corner of the Epson Scan window EPSON Scan E v Jffice Mode Professional Mode Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings Scanning in Office Mode When you scan in Office Mode Epson Scan automatically saves your scanned file in PDF format in your operating system s Documents or My Documents folder or opens it in your scanning program You can select settings preview and change the scanned file settings as necessary 1 Start Epson Scan and select Office Mode as the Mode setting 211 You see this window F EPSON Scan E Delete Auto Detect Letter 8 5 x 11 in None C Conget Document Skew Botate Image Type Resolution Select the Document Source setting indicating where you placed your original To scan a 2 sided document in the ADF select ADF Double sided Note If you are using the ADF remove any documents from the scanner glass 212 o oND 11
152. andard For everyday text and image printing Standard Vivid For text and graphics with good quality and print speed High For photos and graphics with high print quality 115 More Settings Opens a window that lets you choose among levels of speed and quality Parent topic Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Multi Page Printing Options Windows You can select any of the available options in the Multi Page menu to set up your multi page print job 2 Up and 4 Up Prints 2 or 4 pages on one sheet of paper Click the Page Order button to select page layout and border options 2x1 Poster 2x2 Poster 3x3 Poster 4x4 Poster Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a larger poster Click the Settings button to select image layout and guideline options Parent topic Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Double sided Printing Settings Windows You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting one of the 2 Sided Printing options on the Main tab Note Some options may be pre selected or unavailable depending on other settings you have chosen or if you are accessing the product over a network 2 Sided Printing Off y 1 Select one of the following options for 2 Sided Printing e Auto Long edge binding to print your double sided print job by automatically flipping the paper on the long edge e Auto Short edge binding to print your double sided print job by automatically flipping the pape
153. ange your print settings in a program the changes apply only while you are printing in that program session If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs you can select new default print settings 133 1 Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar 2 Select Printer Settings You see the printer settings window Auto Select Letter 8 1 2 x tim Portrait Landscape Z Document 2Sided Plain Paper Bright White Paper SB Cocument 2 4Up T Document 2 Sided with 2Up Standard 2 Comment Fast Grayscale Color J Black Grayscale S Cocument Grayscale E Cocument 12x 17 on C Colste T Reverse Order 3 Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs 4 Click OK These settings are now the defaults selected for printing You can still change them as needed for printing in any program session Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens Parent topic Printing with Windows Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens 1 Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar 134 2 Select Printer Settings You see the printer settings window 3 Click the Maintenance tab You see the maintenance options oes RY reste ons Mead Cleaning AVA Pernt he
154. any time Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non Epson brand or type of paper Always test a sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs 413 Single sheets Size Paper types Weight Envelopes Size Paper types Weight A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches 297 x 420 mm A4 8 3 x 11 7 inches 210 x 297 mm A5 5 8 x 8 2 inches 148 x 210 mm A6 4 1 x 5 8 inches 105 x 148 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 inches 216 x 279 mm Legal 8 5 x 14 inches 216 x 356 mm 4 x 6 inches 102 x 152 mm 5 x 7 inches 127 x 178 mm 8 x 10 inches 203 x 254 mm 3 5 x 5 inches 89 x 127 mm 11 x 17 inches 279 x 432 mm 13 x 19 inches 330 x 483 mm 16 9 wide 4 x 7 1 inches 102 x 181 mm Half Letter 5 5 x 8 5 inches 140 x 279 mm Executive 7 25 x 10 5 inches 184 x 267 mm Plain paper and paper distributed by Epson 17 Ib 64 g m to 68 Ib 256 g m No 10 4 1 x 9 5 inches 105 x 241 mm Plain bond paper 20 Ib 75 g m to 24 Ib 90 g m Parent topic Technical Specifications 414 Printable Area Specifications Single sheets LLL MLL 1 0 12 inch 3 mm minimum 2 1 81 inch 46 mm minimum 3 2 01 inch 51 mm minimum Envelopes 415 0 12 inch 0 20 inch 0 71 inch 1 81 inch 3 mm minimum 5 mm minimum 18 mm minimum AA O N a n 46 mm minimum Parent topic Technical Specifications Ink Cartridge Specifications
155. are To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads Parent topic Solving Scanning Problems Related concepts When to Uninstall Your Product Software Related references Windows System Requirements OS X System Requirements Related tasks Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture 395 Cannot Start Epson Scan If you cannot start Epson Scan try these solutions Make sure your product is turned on and any interface cables are securely connected at both ends Make sure Epson Scan is selected in your scanning program Make sure your computer is not running in a power saving mode such as sleep or standby If so wake your system and restart Epson Scan Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan Settings Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan Settings Make sure the correct Connection setting is selected then click the Test button Windows other versions Click or Start gt All Programs or Programs gt EPSON gt EPSON Scan gt EPSON Scan Settings Make sure the correct Connection setting is selected then click the Test button OS X Open the Applications folder click Epson Software and click EPSON Scan Settings Make sure the correct Connection setting is selected then click the Test button Make sure you do not have multiple versions of Epson Scan installed If you do uninstall both versions and install one version If
156. assette unit remove the paper cassette from the optional cassette unit instead 89 7 Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the cabinet with the corners aligned Secure the product to the cabinet with the included screws Va 0 0 90 Warning To lift the product have two or more people hold it as shown here Lifting from other areas may cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down 91 Note Secure the optional cassette to the cabinet as shown here 92 8 Secure the back of the product or paper cassette unit to the cabinet using the included brackets and screws 9 Insert the paper cassette you removed and attach the output tray 10 Connect the power cord and other connection cables then plug in the product 93 Parent topic Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units You can install up to three optional paper cassette units to provide more paper capacity If you are using the optional cabinet install the cabinet under the bottom of the cassette unit first 1 Turn off the product and unplug the power cord and any connected cables Warning To avoid electric shock make sure you unplug the power cord 2 Uninstall any optional cassette units already installed on the product Note To uninstall any optional cassette units turn off the product unplug the power cord disconnect an
157. ated concepts When to Uninstall Your Product Software Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Product Does Not Appear in OS X Printer Window If your product does not appear in the OS X printer window try these solutions Turn your product off wait 30 seconds then turn it back on again If you are connecting the product via Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS and the Wi Fi icon on your product s LCD is not lit make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router If you are connecting the product wirelessly via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi Fi icon does not appear lit on your LCD screen make sure your product software was installed correctly If necessary reinstall your software Note If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router set the router to operate in dual band 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz mode See your router documentation for instructions Parent topic Solving Network Problems Related concepts When to Uninstall Your Product Software Cannot Print Over a Network If you cannot print over a network try these solutions Make sure that your product is turned on Make sure you install your product s network software as described in your product documentation Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct If the network status is Disconnected check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again If you are us
158. ated savings liability shall be excluded even if nCipher or anyone else has been advised of the possibility of damage In any event if the exclusion of liability is not effective the liability of nCipher or any author or distributor shall be limited to the lesser of the price paid and 1 000 pounds sterling This licence only fails to exclude or limit liability for death or personal injury arising out of negligence and only to the extent that such an exclusion or limitation is not effective NCIPHER AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL AND ANY WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose satisfactory quality and or non infringement of any third party rights US Government use This software and documentation is Commercial Computer Software and Computer Software Documentation as defined in sub paragraphs a 1 and a 5 of DFAR 252 227 7014 Rights in Noncommercial Computer Software and Noncommercial Computer Software Documentation Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the terms and conditions specified here By using or distributing this file you will be accepting these terms and conditions including the limitation of liability and lack of warranty If you do not wish to accept these terms and conditions DO NOT USE THE FILE The actual dynamically loadable plugin and the library files for
159. ations Related references USB Device Photo File Specifications 418 External USB Device Specifications Do not use devices with the following requirements e Dedicated driver e Security settings e Built in USB hub Note Use only external storage devices with independent AC power sources External storage devices that are powered via USB are not recommended Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices Magneto optical drive 1 3GB Hard disk and USB flash 2TB drives Formatted in FAT FAT32 or exFAT Parent topic Technical Specifications Network Interface Specifications Wi Fi Standards IEEE 802 11 b g n complies with either IEEE 802 11 b g or IEEE 802 11 b g n depending on purchase location Wireless security WEP 64 128 bit WPA PSK AES complies with WPA2 with support for WPA WPA2 Personal WPA 2 Enterprise Frequency range 2 4 GHz 419 Coordination modes Infrastructure mode Ad hoc mode not supported for IEEE 802 1 1n Wi Fi Direct mode not supported for IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 1 1n Note Wi Fi Direct Simple AP mode available even if you connect the product to an Ethernet network Ethernet Standards IEEE802 3i 10BASE T IEEE802 3u 100BASE TX IEEE802 3ab 1000BASE T to prevent risk of radio interference use a Category 5e or higher shielded twisted pair cable IEEE802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet connected device should be IEEE802 3az compliant Communication mode Auto
160. axing Problems Related tasks Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass Cleaning Your Product 404 Received Fax Quality is Poor If you receive a poor quality fax try these solutions Try enabling the error correction mode ECM setting Contact the fax sender and ask them to send the fax in a higher resolution e Try reprinting the received fax Parent topic Solving Faxing Problems Related references Basic Settings Fax Received Fax is Not Printed If a received fax is not printed try these solutions e Make sure the product is clear of any errors The product cannot print received faxes if an error has occurred with the product such as a paper jam e Ifthe product has been set to save received faxes in the product s memory or inbox received faxes are not automatically printed Check the Fax Output setting on the product control panel and change it if necessary Parent topic Solving Faxing Problems Related references Output Settings Fax Solving USB Flash Drive Problems Check these solutions if you have problems using USB flash drives with your product Cannot View or Print from a USB Flash Drive Cannot Save Files on a USB Flash Drive Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Flash Drive Parent topic Solving Problems Cannot View or Print from a USB Flash Drive If you cannot view or print photos or documents from a USB flash drive inserted in your product try these solutions e Make sure memory devices are en
161. c Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Starting a Scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture When you scan with Document Capture Pro Windows or Document Capture OS X the program automatically saves your scanned file on your computer in the folder you specify You can select settings preview and change the scanned file settings as necessary 1 Doone of the following to start Document Capture Pro or Document Capture e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro 203 Windows other versions Click amp or Start and select All Programs or Programs Select EPSON Software then select Document Capture Pro e OS X Open the Applications folder select the Epson Software folder and select Document Capture Select your product and click OK if necessary You see a window like this Die Kan dt yes fae Option tip lt n Q Fgh sator Jg Oestination 2 Click the gt Scan icon 204 You see a window like this Letter Auto None Low v 1200 C Tet Enhancement _ Corect Document Skew C Skip Blank Page Detailed Settings C Show the confirmation dialog after scanning L Scan Help Cancel Note With OS X you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software which will provide additional image adjustment features within Document Capture To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads I
162. cassette units and cabinet Depth Stored 22 4 inches 570 mm printer only Printing 35 5 inches 902 mm Depth Stored 31 5 inches 800 mm printer with three optional Printing 35 8 inches 910 mm cassette units and cabinet Weight 77 8 b 35 3 kg printer only Weight 194 7 Ib 88 3 kg printer with three optional cassette units and cabinet Without ink cartridges or power cord Parent topic Technical Specifications Electrical Specifications Power supply rating 100 to 240 V 220 to 240 V Rated frequency range 50 60 Hz Rated current 100 to 240 V model 1 2 to 0 6 A 220 to 240 V model 0 8 A 417 Power consumption Standalone copying Approx 39 W ISO IEC24712 100 to 240 V model Ready mode 17 W Sleep mode 2 4 W Power off mode 0 4 W Power consumption Standalone copying Approx 39 W ISO IEC24712 220 to 240 V model Ready mode 17 W Sleep mode 2 9 W Power off mode 0 5 W Parent topic Technical Specifications Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating 50 to 95 F 10 to 35 C Storage 4 to 104 F 20 to 40 C 1 month at 104 F 40 C Humidity Operating 20 to 80 RH without condensation Storage 5 to 85 RH Parent topic Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Interface type Hi Speed USB for computer Hi Speed USB for external USB device Note Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices Parent topic Technical Specific
163. ce This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary 448 applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on th
164. ceescceeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeeseeaeeeeeeeaaaeeseecaeeeteeaaaeeees 126 Extended Settings WiNdOWS ce cccccacet aed octet cehcnces coectusesudadeteedetes aden cdeeeeehtpeeadivotedtawer diets 127 Printing Your Document or Photo WiINdOWS iisis5 sc etenedeninieee eid adsl ewan 128 Locking Printer Settings WiINdOWS cc csccceesseeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeaaaeeeeaaeeseeeneaeeeesaaeeenseaees 129 Administrator LOCK Setting Sire denda st eet eshame eer nema R a he pan eide casuals 131 Entering a User ID and Password for Printing ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeesaas 132 Selecting Default Print Settings WINGOWS c ccceeeceeceseeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeseneeseneenseenees 133 Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeteneeeenaees 134 Changing Automatic Update Options ceeeeeceeeecceeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeaaaeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeenegaeeseeeaaeeeees 135 AAA RIIALE IR EE E E EE eae a hea E E E E A 136 Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X 02 00 Sect dino taeda ones 137 Paper Source Options OS Aiwa et oe can Bs ee ee ee ee igs 141 Print Quality Options SOS Koss ses ego sels tees a a cael oes decue den eee eked etna ital ae 141 PrinkOpuons OS X cpgssccisb ited a E kaa A R e aa teed 142 Selecting Page Setup Settings OS Xoo cecccceeececeeeecceeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeenaeeeeeeaaaaeesecaeeesteneaeeees 142 Selecting Print Layout Option
165. ch and you will double the image size later change the resolution setting to 600 dpi Note Higher resolution settings result in larger file sizes which take longer to process and print Consider the limitations of your computer system when selecting a resolution and select the lowest possible resolution that produces acceptable quality to keep file sizes manageable Parent topic Solving Print Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment 393 Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Selecting Printing Preferences OS X Related topics Loading Paper Incorrect Colors If your printouts have incorrect colors try these solutions e Make sure the Black Grayscale or Grayscale setting is not selected in your printer software e If you selected Standard Vivid Windows or Normal Vivid OS X as the quality setting in the printer software try selecting Standard Windows or Normal OS X instead e Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged Then clean the print head if necessary The ink cartridges may be old or low on ink and you may need to replace them e Your printed colors can never exactly match your on screen colors However you can use a color management system to get as close as possible Try using the color management options
166. ck the printer icon when it appears in the Dock You see the print status window eoo 1 Job Aj oo Pause Settings Scanner _ page_setup_mac108 tiff 7 Se Se Se SS O a a a O O O O a 2 Select the following options as necessary OS X 10 5 10 6 10 7 To cancel printing click the print job and click the Delete icon To pause a print job click the print job and click the Hold icon To resume a print job click the print job marked Hold and click the Resume icon To pause printing for all queued print jobs click the Pause Printer icon e To check ink status click the Supply Levels icon OS X 10 8 10 9 To cancel printing click the E button next to the print job To pause a print job click the oO button next to the print job To resume a print job click the C button To pause printing for all queued print jobs click the large Pause button e To check ink status click the Settings icon then click the Supply Levels tab Parent topic Printing Your Document or Photo OS X Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows You can print with the Epson Universal Print Driver using any Windows printing program as described in these sections 151 Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Synchronizing Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Opt
167. computer instead e If your computer entered sleep mode the last time you printed the next print job after your computer exits sleep mode may contain garbled characters Print your document again e If incorrect characters still appear in your prints try connecting your product using a different cable Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Incorrect Image Size or Position If your printed image is the wrong size or in the wrong position try these solutions e Make sure you selected the correct paper size and layout settings in your printing program and printer software e Make sure you selected the correct paper size on the control panel e Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer 388 e Clean the scanner glass and document cover You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Selecting Page Setup Settings OS X Cleaning Your Product Slanted Printout If your printouts are slanted try these solutions e Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper Select a higher print quality setting in your printer software Turn off any high speed settings in your product software e Align the print head e Make sure the prod
168. croll down and select Language Select a language Parent topic Using the Control Panel oy ot oe Adjusting Control Panel Sounds You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 26 You see a screen like this Ink Levels mtes ooo ha Paver Set Prin Staws Sheet Maintenance Paper Setup _ Print Status Sheet _Network Status ly Scroll down and select System Administration Select Common Settings Select Sound Select Button Press Press a to decrease or to increase the sound Select OK to exit oN OTP w Note You can also adjust the Sound Type and the sound level for various product functions Parent topic Using the Control Panel Adjusting the Screen Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen 1 Press the f home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 27 oa kw 7 You see a screen like this miie A Maintenance LE a PIES Prine statysset Paper Setup _ Print Status Sheed network Stas ir Scroll down and select System Administration Select Common Settings Select LCD Brightness Adjust the screen brightness by selecting a brightness level or by pressing the left or right arrow button Select OK to
169. ct Disable However disabling the dial tone detection function may drop the first digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number Parent topic Setting Up Basic Fax Features Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Selecting the Line Type If you connect the product to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter you must change the product s line type PBX Private Branch Exchange is used in office environments where an external access code such as 9 must be dialed to call an outside line The default Line Type setting is PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network which is a standard home phone line Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you can t access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 255 NO a A Press the ft home button if necessary Select Setup ii Setup gt Ink Levels Maintenance Paper Setup Print Status Sheet Rework Status Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary fy System Adninistration Printer Settings Connon Settings Wi Fi Hebaork Settiness Epson Connect Services iGoogle Cloud Print Services Scroll down and select Fax Settings Select Basic Settings Select Line Type Select PBX 256 You see a screen like this fey Access Code eo Do Not Use a 8 Select Use 9 Select Access Code 10 Use the displayed keypad to enter the access co
170. d Sound then right click your printer name and select Properties Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click your product name and select Properties 2 Click the Optional Settings tab 101 You see a window like this General Sharing Pets Advanced Color Management Securty Ontenal Setings Version hiomaton A Prener Utity Current Previer Information Printer Information Printer Type Acqure fom Printer C Only Optional information AdActter Coie Standard Resaluter 609 Defauit of Printer Control Language Manual Settings EX PR Aste Duplexer instalied retaled Confidential Job Ma lt 3 Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected then click Get The optional paper sources are listed in the Current Printer Information section 4 Click OK The optional paper cassettes are now enabled Parent topic Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Related tasks Synchronizing Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes OS X You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software 102 Note If you are using the PostScript PS3 printer software see the section covering that software in this manual to enable the optional cassette units In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences 2 Select Pr
171. d by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at leas
172. d found printers Select a pot to connect a pater Select from found printers Found Printers Model Name IP Address MAC Address 192 168 1131 OO26ABFSEDSC 192 168 1126 ASEES74CAD32 5 Doone of the following e If you are installing one product make sure Add EPSON Universal Print Driver is selected and continue with the next step If you are installing more than one product select Add found printers and go to step 9 Note You can customize and filter your product search results by clicking Display Settings 154 Open the Select a port to connect a printer pop up menu and select an existing printer port if necessary Otherwise skip this option to have a new port created automatically Select the product you want to install from the Found Printers list Note Deselect the Set as default printer checkbox if you do not want the product to be set as your default printer Click OK then skip the remaining steps Select each product you want to install and click Add to Printer Folder Add EPSON Universal Prot Dever Add found printers Select parters from the folowing tet and then cick the Add to Panter Folder button You can select multiple printers from the list Found Printers Mode Name IP Address MAC Address WP J00 Series 192 168 1131 OO26ABFEEDSC WE 00 Series 192 168 1126 ASEES74CADI2 Add to Printer Folder imiraa laane Nama of added pistar IP Address 7 EPSON Universal Print Driver
173. d nozzles Because deaning consumes some ink only dean the print head when faint areas or gaps appear in your printout Use the Nozzle Check utility first to confirm that the print head needs to be deaned If the ink is low or expended replace the cartridge first 4 Click Start to begin the cleaning cycle Caution Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not be able to print 5 When the cleaning cycle is finished you can check to see if the nozzles are clean click Print Nozzle Check Pattern and click Print 6 Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines Print head is clean 336 ge 3 gt O D a S p D Q 7 o go J 3 Q I HAMMAR e lf there are no gaps click Finish e lf there are gaps or the pattern is faint click Clean to clean the print head again If you don t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times wait at least 6 hours without printing or longer if printing Then try cleaning the print head again If quality still does not improve one of the ink cartridges may be old or damaged and needs to be replaced Parent topic Print Head Cleaning Related tasks Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Related topics Loading Paper Print Head Alignment If your printouts become grainy or blurry you notice misalignment of vertical lines or you see dark or lig
174. d oboe a a 329 Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel s sssssssessserirsrirerirsrrrserrrrrisrrrnerrnnrnn 330 Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility cc ececeeeeeecee eee eeeee eee eeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeee 332 Print Head ClOaninG esot a a sae a aii 333 Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel sssssesssesssreeseerrrsrrrerrrerereerrennn 334 Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility s seeeneeeeeneeeeennessnerrssrrrnsrrrnnnernnnrrrnnensnnne 335 Print Head Alignment sae a e a coeds sce a A ead aa cae aa EE a a ra SEE Er 337 Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel seesesssssessisesrrsrrrsrrrerirsrinrsrrrerrserense 337 Aligning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility eee cece eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeesaaeeeeeaees 339 Cleaning the Paper Guide ese rer cere aaae E me ee E eA aE AEEA e a 341 Cleaning and Transporting Your Product cesseccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeesenseeeeeesseeaeeeeeseneeeeneeeeeeeees 343 Cl aning Your ProdUCE ai e e E dace E R E EE E 343 Transporting Your PrOGUCH cuisine cat ceueccataedeeadeid hel occas sweet EEE oE AEAEE E AKENE 346 Solving POD SHINS ooo oo sa sascha ewe ee eee ee 348 Checking for Software WP ALeS ra Sets 2s es ote Sanetesbee dee oct Synticea yo ntl dapat cde gee tum adele ean oe 348 Product Status Messages 1 cct isla heh Ee ae Sal ele tine ee SS ace ade ca Sek ek Bae ae 349 Status Men Error Codes Ara
175. d print the image if desired Available Document Source Settings Office Mode Selecting a Scan Area Office Mode Available Image Adjustments Office Mode Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings Related concepts Image Preview Guidelines 213 Scan Resolution Guidelines Related tasks Scanning in Professional Mode Selecting Scan File Settings Available Document Source Settings Office Mode You can select these Document Source options in Epson Scan Office Mode Scanner Glass Selects the scanner glass as the location where the originals are placed on your product for scanning ADF Single sided Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your product for single sided scanning ADF Double sided Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your product for double sided scanning Auto Detect Automatically detects where the originals are placed on your product for scanning Parent topic Scanning in Office Mode Selecting a Scan Area Office Mode You can select a specific area in your preview image to include in your scanned image You can select the entire image area or a portion of it You can even select multiple scan areas to create multiple scanned images of different areas You can also use the scan area to select specific Image Adjustments settings for a scanned image Just be sure to click inside the scan area before selecting the
176. day and 7 AM to 4 PM Pacific Time Saturday Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice Toll or long distance charges may apply Purchase Supplies and Accessories You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at Epson Supplies Central at epson com ink3 U S sales or epson ca Canadian sales You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller To find the nearest one call 800 GO EPSON 800 463 7766 Parent topic Solving Problems 409 Technical Specifications These sections list the technical specifications for your product Note Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products Please go to this site for information on how to return your products for proper disposal Windows System Requirements OS X System Requirements Scanning Specifications Automatic Document Feeder ADF Specifications Fax Specifications Paper Specifications Printable Area Specifications Ink Cartridge Specifications Dimension Specifications Electrical Specifications Environmental Specifications Interface Specifications External USB Device Specifications Network Interface Specifications Safety and Approvals Specifications PS3 Mode Fonts PCL5 Mode Fonts PCL6 Mode Fonts Symbol Sets Windows System Requirements To use your product and its software your computer should use one of these Microsoft operating systems e Windows 8 x e Windows 7 e Windows Vista 410 e Windows XP Professional x
177. dditional Layout and Print Options Epson Universal Print Driver Windows 160 Selecting Maintenance Options Epson Universal Print Driver WiNdOWS eceeeeeeeeees 162 Extended Settings Epson Universal Print Driver WiINGOWS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeaes 163 Selecting Default Print Settings Epson Universal Print Driver WindOwWS 0 cceeseeeeeee 164 Locking Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver WiNdOWS c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeees 166 Epson Universal Print Driver Lock Settings ccceecceseeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeessneneaes 168 Adding Network Printers Epson Universal Print Driver WINdOWS ccs eeeeee esse eteeeees 169 Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software WiINGOWS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeteneeees 172 Installing the PostScript PS3 Printer Software WINdOWS ccccccceesesccteeeeeseesntteeeeeeeeeees 172 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software Windows 06 172 Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software WINdOWS cceseeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 174 Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options PostScript Printer Software Windows 177 Selecting Default Print Settings PostScript Printer Software WiINdOWS scceeeeeeeeeteees 178 Printing with the PostScript PS3 Pri
178. de such as 9 and select OK Parent topic Setting Up Basic Fax Features Setting the Number of Rings to Answer If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically make sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct The number of rings should be higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 257 Select Setup ie Ei e bi Selup ink Levels Paper Setup Print Status Sheet l Network Stalus Google Cloud Print Servings Scroll down and select Fax Settings Select Receive Settings 258 6 Select Rings to Answer fy Rings to Answer eE 7 Select the number of rings and select OK Make sure to select a number higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call Note An answering machine picks up every call faster than the product but the product can detect fax tones and start receiving faxes If you answer the phone and hear a fax tone check that the product has started receiving the fax then hang up the phone Parent topic Setting Up Basic Fax Features Selecting Advanced Fax Settings You can select a variety of advanced fax settings Note These settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot acces
179. de the product SE a 4 Carefully follow all paper loading instructions and reload the paper 5 Keep the cassette flat as you gently insert it 6 Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages If you still see a paper jam message check the other paper jam solutions Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 If paper has jammed in the rear cover 1 follow the steps here to clear the jam 1 Cancel the print job if necessary 372 2 Open rear cover 1 D1 373 4 Pull out rear cover 2 D2 6 Insert rear cover 2 D2 7 Close rear cover 1 D1 8 Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages If you still see a paper jam message check the other paper jam solutions Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 374 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Opt
180. ded Do Not Print Attach Image to Report Does not include an image of the fax on transmission reports On Small Image Prints transmission reports with an image of the first On Large Image ae ae Does not work when you select Direct Fax Log Auto Print Does not print the fax log On Every 30 Prints the fax log after 30 faxes are sent or received On Time Prints the fax log at a time you select using the numeric keypad displayed on the LCD screen Report Format Simple Selects the amount of information on fax reports Parent topic Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Basic Settings Fax Set the basic options you want to use for incoming and outgoing faxes Setting Options Description Fax Speed Sets the speed at which you send and receive faxes Turns on Error Correction Mode ECM to automatically correct errors in sent or received fax data Turns off Error Correction Mode ECM color faxes cannot be sent or received 265 Setting Options Description i O Dial Tone Detection Automatically dials the number you enter for faxing when the product detects a dial tone Turns off automatic dial tone detection which may be necessary if the product is connected to a PBX Private Branch Exchange or a TA Terminal Adapter However turning this setting off may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number Line Type PSTN Selects a standard phone line Public Switched Telephone Network Selects Priva
181. duct Safety Instructions FCC Compliance Statement Software Notice Trademarks Copyright Notice General Product Safety Instructions Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Use only the type of power source indicated on the product s label Use only the power cord that comes with the product Use of another cord may cause fires or shock Do not use the cord with any other equipment Place the product near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged Avoid plugging the product into an outlet on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system that regularly switches on and off or on an outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed Place it to avoid abrasions cuts fraying crimping and kinking Do not place objects on top of it and do not allow it to be stepped on or run over Be careful to keep the cord straight at each end If you use an extension cord with the product make sure the total ampere rating of the devices plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord s ampere rating Also make sure the total ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet s ampere rating Always turn off the product using the power button and wait until the power light stops flashing before unplugging the product or cutting off power to the electrical outlet If you will not be using the product for a l
182. e Settings gt Receive Mode and select Manual When the connected telephone rings answer the call If you hear a fax tone select Start Fax on the LCD display Select Receive Press one of the buttons to start receiving the fax Hang up the telephone oa e wh Parent topic Receiving Faxes Related references Receive Settings Fax 298 Related tasks Receiving Faxes Automatically Forwarding Received Faxes You can forward received faxes to another fax machine or convert the faxes into PDF documents and forward them to a shared folder on the network or to an email address Forwarded faxes are deleted from the product s memory Before using this feature make sure the date and time are set correctly the forwarding destination is set up in the contact list and the email server settings are configured Note Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine 1 Press the home button if necessary 2 Select Setup ink Levels Maibenance Paper Setun Print Status Sheet Network Stalus fy Sistem Adninistration Printer Seftings Connon Settings Wie Fi Hetero Settings Epson Connect Services Google Choad Print Services 299 oan on s 10 11 12 13 14 15 Scroll down and select Fax Settings Select Output Settings Select Fax Output Select Settings Select Forward Select On Note If you want to print the fax automatically before forwarding it select Yes and Pr
183. e checkbox next to one or more contact select the checkbox again to deselect it You can also select the Search field to search for recipients by name index name or entry number Select Proceed when you are finished Select from the sent fax history Select History to display the sent fax history Select a recipient from the list select Menu and select Send to this number Note To delete entered recipients select the Enter a Fax Number field select the recipient you want to delete and select Delete from the List 5 If you need to change any fax settings select Menu select Fax Send Settings and select your settings 284 6 If you want to preview your fax in black and white on the LCD select Preview If the preview looks incorrect select Retry reposition the document or change the fax settings and repeat this step Note If you do not touch the preview screen for 20 seconds your product sends the fax automatically You cannot preview images when the Direct Send setting is turned on 7 lf you want to save your fax settings for later use select Presets and add a new entry 8 Press one of the buttons Note To cancel faxing press the Stop button You can also cancel the job or check the job status from the Status Menu Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages if necessary After scanning your originals your product dials the number and sends the fax Note Your product does n
184. e Border pop up menu To print on both sides of the page select one of the Two Sided settings To invert or flip the printed image select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X 188 Sizing Printed Images PostScript Printer Software OS X You can adjust the size of the image as you print it by selecting Paper Handling from the pop up menu on the Print window Paper Handling Y Collate pages Pages to Print All pages Page Order Automatic Scale to fit paper size Cancel Print To print only selected pages in a multi page document select an option from the Pages to Print pop up menu To adjust the order in which pages are printed select an option from the Page Order pop up menu e To scale the image to fit on a specific paper size select the Scale to fit paper size checkbox and select a paper size from the Destination Paper Size pop up menu Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Managing Color PostScript Printer Software OS X You can adjust the Color Matching settings to fine tune the colors in your printout 1 Select Color Matching from the pop up menu in the print window Color Matching ColorSync In printer Profile Automatic 189 2 Doone of the following e To print using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors
185. e Options OS X You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that source Auto Select Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size Cassette 1 Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source Cassette 2 Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source Paper Cassette 3 Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source Paper Cassette 4 Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source Rear Paper Feed Slot Selects the paper in the rear feed slot as the paper source Parent topic Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Print Quality Options OS X You can select any of the available Print Quality options to fine tune the quality of your print Some settings may be unavailable depending on the paper type setting you have chosen Draft For draft printing on plain paper Normal For everyday text and image printing Normal Vivid For everyday text and image printing with good quality and print speed Fine For text and graphics with good quality and print speed Quality For text and graphics with increased quality and print speed Best Quality For the best print quality but the slowest print speed 141 Parent topic Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Print Options OS X You can select any of the print options to customize your print Some options may be unavailable depending on other settings you have chosen
186. e ace ceae cc Pesaecep cleat lt 6 iecercadnlesacs ter anpnancddag depteadapustnes cemeeneansmeetituad 398 Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges ecn6 x veces ceed neat be a ease sibeeaee ee oyna 398 NLS IS POO Dari a eee cat Stet eed sell cct aa eee ae NM Sac eae echt Nee de al 398 Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned IMage cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeetenaees 399 Ripple Patterns Appear in an IMage wiisicciccee increta lencesbelsaaacabaeerins eniariotindetataesdigeebidentecnerdenes 399 Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors cccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeees 399 12 Scan Area is Not Adjustable in Thumbnail Preview cccceeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeteneeeees 400 Scanned Image Edges are Cropped ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeseeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeesneeeeeeeaaaeeees 400 Solving Faxing Problems c2ccie 3ctetcosedacssannedetestoeeedslanhats feds onedas tetas a A AEE Ei RATELE 400 Cannot Send or Receive Faxes ccccccccsssccceesseeceeeseeeeneeneeeeeeeaaeeeenaaaeeseeneaaeeeesaeeesessneseneeaaeeeea 401 Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product ccccssssceeeeeeseeenees 402 Fax Memory Full Error APP Gans eacctecd Neo Siete tes eee ara A ae ee ee A cee aide 403 Sent Fa Qualy SP OOM a aes ne Rea need cde E E aa iah 403 Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size o oo eee ce eececcceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeea
187. e documents facedown in 2 Sided mode Outputs single sided pages in a 2 sided print job facedown instead of faceup Parent topic Selecting Maintenance Options Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Selecting Default Print Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows When you change your print settings in a program the changes apply only while you are printing in that program session If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs you can select new default print settings 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Print Preferences Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printing Preferences 164 e Windows Vista Click 6 and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printing Preferences e Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printing Preferences You see the printer settings window Ato Select Letter 8 1 2 x tin Potrat Landscape Plain Paper Bright White Paper Qusity Standard Color Cow Goayrcee 2SdedPrntrg Of Note For more information about a setting right click it and select Help 2 Select the print
188. e explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no war
189. e of these Auto Error Resolver options e Turn on this setting to display a warning and print single sided when a 2 sided printing error occurs or to print only what the printer could process when a memory full error occurs e Turn off this setting to display an error message and stop printing if an error occurs 7 When you are finished press the ff home button to exit Paper Source Settings Options 83 Parent topic Selecting Default Paper Settings Administrator Paper Source Settings Options Select the paper source options you want to use for your printed jobs Paper Source Available settings Description Settings option Rear Paper Feed Normal si Select Normal to give printing priority to paper loaded in the Priority Last rear paper feed slot A4 Letter Auto Select On to switch the selected paper size to match the Switching lof loaded paper Letter or A4 if the wrong size is selected Auto Select Copy Select On for any of these settings to automatically print on Settings Fax paper from any source containing paper that matches your paper settings Paper Size Notice Select On for either of these settings to display an error message when the selected paper type or size does not Paper Type Notice match the loaded paper Parent topic Selecting the Default Printer Settings Setting the Universal Print Settings You can change the default universal print settings using the control panel on the product Note Th
190. e or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software 443 Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary T
191. e print head if necessary e Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Extended Settings Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Selecting Printing Preferences OS X 387 Incorrect Margins on Printout If your printed page has incorrect margins try these solutions e Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software e Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program e Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Related topics Loading Paper Incorrect Characters Print If incorrect characters appear in your prints try these solutions before reprinting e Make sure any cables are securely connected at both ends In Windows delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window and cancel any stalled print jobs e If your product is connected to a USB hub connect it directly to your
192. e restrictions of Paragraphs 3 and 4 provided that you do not represent such an executable image as a Standard Version of this Package 7 C subroutines or comparably compiled subroutines in other languages supplied by you and linked into this Package in order to emulate subroutines and variables of the language defined by this Package shall not be considered part of this Package but are the equivalent of input as in Paragraph 6 provided these subroutines do not change the language in any way that would cause it to fail the regression tests for the language 8 Aggregation of the Standard Version of the Package with a commercial distribution is always permitted provided that the use of this Package is embedded that is when no overt attempt is made to make this Package s interfaces visible to the end user of the commercial distribution Such use shall not be construed as a distribution of this Package 9 The name of the Copyright Holder may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 10 THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE The End 477 Copyright C 1991 1992 1993 by Chris Thewalt thewalt ce berkeley edu Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby grant
193. e solutions e Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends If you still have problems installing software disconnect the cable and carefully follow the instructions on the Start Here sheet Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system e Close any other programs including screen savers and virus protection software and install your product software again In Windows make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in the printer properties e If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows you may not have software installation privileges Contact your System Administrator Parent topic Solving Setup Problems Related concepts When to Uninstall Your Product Software Related references Windows System Requirements OS X System Requirements Solving Network Problems Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network Note Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings Epson is not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period We recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network Product Does Not
194. e starting the Google Cloud Print setup Connect your device to the same network that your Epson product is using Print a network status sheet Locate your product s IP address on the network status sheet Enter the IP address into the address bar of a web browser Select the Google Cloud Print Services option arwn Note If you don t see the Google Cloud Print Services option turn your product off and back on If the option still doesn t appear select the Firmware Update option and follow the on screen instructions to update your product 6 Click Register Select the checkbox to agree to the Usage Advisory and click Next Click OK to launch the sign in page A separate browser window opens 42 9 Enter your Google Account username and password and click Sign in or if you don t have an account click Sign up for a new Google Account and follow the on screen instructions 10 Click Finish printer registration to complete setup and print a test page Your product is now linked to your Google Account and can be accessed from any Chromebook computer Apple or Android device with Internet access Visit Epson Support for more information on using Google Cloud Print or the Google Cloud Print website for a list of supported apps Setting Up Google Cloud Print on a Chromebook Parent topic Product Basics Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Setting Up Google Cloud Print on a Chromebook With a Google Account you can prin
195. e this Genera T Opti gt S Supply Levels To take full advantage of your printer s options confirm that they are accurately shown here For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the printer s documentation Lower Cassette Unit None Cance L Qn 4 Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting 5 Click OK The optional paper cassettes are now enabled Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes OS X Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print 1 2 Open a photo or document for printing Select the print command in your application Note You may need to select a print icon on your screen the Print option in the File menu or another command See your application s help utility for details 181 Select your product as the Printer setting Printer EPSON Presets Default Settings If necessary click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the print window You see the expanded printer settings window for your product Printer EPSON Presets Default Settings Copies 1 Pages All From 1 to 1 Paper Size US Letter 8 50 by 11 00 inches Orientation f H T gt Preview V Auto Rotate Scale Scal
196. e to Fit Print Entire Image Fill Entire Paper Copies per page Cancel 182 Note The print window may look different depending on the version of OS X and the application you are using Select the Two Sided Copies and Pages settings as necessary Note If you do not see these settings in the print window check for them in your application before printing Select the page setup options Paper Size and Orientation Note If you do not see these settings in the print window check for them in your application before printing They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu Select any application specific settings that appear on the screen such as those shown in the image above for the Preview application Select Paper Feed from the pop up menu v Preview Layout Color Matching Paper Handling Paper Feed Cover Page Printer Features Supply Levels 183 You see these settings Paper Feed All Pages From Auto Select First Page From Rear Paper Feed Remaining From Rear Paper Feed Cancel 9 Select All Pages From or First Page From and select the paper source you want to print from 10 Select Printer Features from the pop up menu Y Preview Layout Color Matching Paper Handling Paper Feed Cover Page Supply Levels 184 You see these settings Printer Features Feature Sets Quality MediaType Plain Print Quali
197. e to copy documents or photos using your product Note Copies may not be exactly the same size as your originals Copying Documents or Photos Copying Options Copying Documents or Photos You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper including Epson special papers 1 Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass or place multi page documents in the ADF Load the paper you want to print on Press the f home button if necessary 4 Select Copy You see a screen like this Ey Copy Ay Layout m hi Bord er 5 To print more than one copy press a number key on the product s control panel or select copies and use the displayed keypad to enter the number of copies 6 Change any of the displayed settings as necessary 108 7 Select Settings to view and change additional copy settings if necessary Then press the X back button Select Preview to preview your copy on the LCD screen 9 Select Preset to save your copy settings Note Presets can be locked by an administrator If you can t access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 10 When you are ready to copy press one of the buttons Note To cancel printing press the Stop button or select Cancel Parent topic Copying Related references Available Epson Papers Copying Options Related tasks Using Presets Related topics Loading Paper Placing Originals on the Product Copying Options
198. e with any force Note If lines appear on the printout or in scanned images carefully clean the scanner glass on the left 344 6 Raise the lever and open the ADF cover F 7 Useasoft dry lint free cloth microfiber is recommended to clean the rollers and the interior of the ADF 8 Clean the outer case and control panel with a soft dry cloth Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers 345 Parent topic Cleaning and Transporting Your Product Transporting Your Product If you need to store your product or transport it prepare it for transportation as described here Caution During transportation and storage follow these guidelines Use two or more people to lift the product e When lifting the product hold it as shown here Holding other areas may cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down Leave the maintenance box installed otherwise ink may leak When placing the product on the optional cabinet lock the casters on the cabinet first Avoid tilting the product placing it vertically or turning it upside down otherwise ink may leak Leave the ink cartridges installed Removing the cartridges can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing 1 Turn off the product Unplug the power cord nm 346 Disconnect any connected cables Remove all the paper from the product Make sure there are no originals on the product Close
199. eate multiple scanned images of different areas Normal Preview mode only You can also use the scan area to select specific image Adjustments settings for a scanned image Just be sure to click inside the scan area before selecting the settings Note In Professional Mode the default Preview mode is Normal Preview mode To use Thumbnail Preview mode instead click the Thumbnail tab 222 1 Doone of the following to select your scan area in the Preview image Normal preview Click the a Auto Locate icon to create a marquee dotted line on the preview image Welcome to EPSON 7 A 492 25 in D143 2476 x 3429 pixels 2429 MB 223 Thumbnail preview Your scan area is selected automatically but you can change it Place your cursor in one corner of the desired scan area then click and drag the cursor to the opposite corner to create a marquee dotted line on the preview image Noama Thurtevad 7 R 623i 1133n 2438 x 3398 pixels 23 70 MB 2 Do the following as necessary to work with the selected scan area e Ifthe marquee is correct continue with the next step To move the marquee click inside the scan area and drag the marquee where you want it 224 To resize the scan area place your cursor over the edge or corner of the marquee then click and drag the edges where you want them Hold down the Shift key as you resize the marquee to retain the same width height proportions Normal preview
200. ecipients Priority Send Off Select On to send the current fax before other faxes On waiting to be sent Continuous Scan from Off Select On to have the product to ask if you want to ADF scan another page after a document in the ADF has finished scanning 286 Setting Options Description O Transmission Report Lets you select when to print transmission reports Do Not Print Parent topic Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Sending a Fax at a Specified Time You can send a fax at a time of your choice Note Make sure the product s date and time settings are correct You can only send faxes in black and white when you use this option 1 Place your original on the product for faxing 2 Press the home button if necessary Select Fax Contacts History Oni Hak er Preset Note To fax a double sided document place your document in the ADF and turn on the ADF 2 Sided setting Enter a fax number or select a number from the Contacts list or History Select Menu Select Send Fax Later Select On NO oO fF 287 8 Select Time use the displayed keypad on the LCD screen to enter your desired time and select OK 9 Press one of the buttons Note To cancel faxing press the Stop button After scanning your originals your product dials the number and sends the fax at the specified time Note If the product is turned off at the specified time the fax is sent when it is powered on Pa
201. ect a Layout Direction setting To print borders around each page on the sheet select a line setting from the Border pop up menu To invert or flip the printed image select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings Parent topic Printing with OS X 143 Selecting Double sided Printing Settings OS X You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting Two sided Printing Settings from the pop up menu on the print window Two sided Printing Settings Two sided Printing Off Cancel Print Note Some options may be pre selected or unavailable depending on other settings you have chosen or if you are accessing the product over a network This screen may be different depending on the version of OS X you are using 1 Select one of the Two sided Printing options 144 2 Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting The software automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type Two sided Printing Settings Two sided Printing Long Edge binding Document Type Text Y Adjustments Print Density 0 9 50 0 Increased Ink Drying Time gt 0 sec 0 60 A When printing a photo or document containing a lot of solid image areas reduce the density of the ink and increase its drying time Cancel t Print 3 If necessary customize the Adjustments settings as instructed on the screen 4 Print atest copy of your double sided doc
202. ectly No dial tone detected Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works If you connected the product to a PBX Private Branch Exchange phone line or Terminal Adapter change the Line Type setting to PBX If you still cannot send a fax turn off the Dial Tone Detection setting Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number Combination of IP address and There is a problem with the network connection to your product subnet mask is invalid Recovery mode An error has occurred during firmware updating Connect your product using a USB cable and try downloading the Firmware Update from the Epson support site If you still need help contact Epson for support Parent topic Solving Problems Related references Where to Get Help Related tasks Checking for Software Updates Selecting the Line Type Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Status Menu Error Codes If a job does not complete successfully you can check the error code Press the Status button then select Job History and locate the incomplete job Select the job to display the error code and additional information 350 Condition solution The product was turned off by a power failure Memory is full Reduce the size of the print job Collated printing has failed due to a lack of avai
203. ed provided that the above copyright notices appear in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright C The Internet Society 2001 All Rights Reserved This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to others and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in its implementation may be prepared copied published and distributed in whole or in part without restriction of any kind provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are included on all such copies and derivative works However this document itself may not be modified in any way such as by removing the copyright notice or references to the Internet Society or other Internet organizations except as needed for the purpose of developing Internet standards in which case the procedures for copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must be followed or as required to translate it into languages other than English The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns This document and the information contained herein is provided on an AS IS basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE U
204. ed tasks Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting Printing Preferences OS X Related topics Loading Paper Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes 390 Blurry or Smeared Printout If your printouts are blurry or smeared try these solutions Make sure your paper is not damp curled old or loaded incorrectly in your product Use a support sheet with special paper or load special paper one sheet at a time Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product Use Epson papers to ensure proper saturation and absorption of genuine Epson inks Make sure the paper type setting in your product software matches the type of paper you loaded Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes turn on the Thick Paper setting from the control panel or select Thick Paper and Envelopes in the Extended Settings of the printer software Turning this setting on will decrease print speed In Windows if the paper is still smeared after selecting the Thick Paper and Envelopes setting select the Short Grain Paper setting in the Extended Settings of the printer software Remove each sheet from the output tray as it is printed Avoid handling printouts on glossy paper right after printing to allow the ink to set Turn off any high speed settings in your product software If you print on both sides of a sheet of paper smudges may ap
205. ed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COMPUTING RESEARCH LAB OR NEW MEXICO STATE UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE UCD Terms of Use http www unicode org Public UNIDATA UCD html Disclaimer The Unicode Character Database is provided as is by Unicode Inc No claims are made as to fitness for any particular purpose No warranties of any kind are expressed or implied The recipient agrees to determine applicability of information provided If this file has been purchased on magnetic or optical media from Unicode Inc the sole remedy for any claim will be exchange of defective media within 90 days of receipt This disclaimer is applicable for all other data files accompanying the Unicode Character Database some of which have been compiled by the Unicode Consortium and some of which have been supplied by other sources Limitations on Rights to Redistribute This Data Recipient is granted the right to m
206. ee a screen like this ret Resolution k Contacts om History a Document i Ade Om Hogk enw H i Preview te Preset 3 Select Contacts Enter the administrator password if necessary 270 You see a screen like this D Ei E O01 mae ABC O on 5 GEDEGES 7 ons a Book cub Proceed 4 Select Menu You see a screen like this Mend C Ald Entry Auld Creu Print Contacts Note You can print your list of contacts and groups if necessary 5 Select Add Entry 6 Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding 271 You see a screen like this Add Entry Het Entered Index Ford Hot Entered Cancel 7 Select the Name field use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name up to 30 characters and press 8 Select the Index Word field use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for an entry up to 30 characters and press k This field is optional 9 Select the Fax Number field and use the numeric keypad on the LCD screen or the buttons on the product to enter the fax number You can enter up to 64 characters Note If necessary enter an outside line access code such as 9 at the beginning of the fax number If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting enter the pound sign instead of the code 10 Set the Fax Speed if necessary 11 Select Save Parent topic Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control
207. eeeeeeaeeees 192 Scanningto EMail edea Oya ates senate Bare cpt cee Dee weet ara aan 194 Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Servet cccccscceeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseesneeeeeesaeeeeenas 196 Control Panel Scanning Options sce casei eed scce re aaeehednceteet dosed seteeeeae tebe ecacedeeventue oie tedtiuects 198 Creating Contacts for Scanning isicccicuss cs pceeeteceetavdectageactadl dus andavuscapdstindbabiaede candi cagaeeneiecsiaadlecs 200 Adding and Assigning Scan Jobss 251 s ceca ccileeeasdececiedad cca ecchseeades bea vad daccasesasotaenig ddenesacendpteasak 202 Starting a Scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture cccccceseseceeeeeeesssnaees 203 Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan ICON ceceeeccsceeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeesaaeeeneaeeeeeeeaaaeesnscaeeseeeeaaaees 206 Starting a Scan from a Scanning Programm ccceeeecceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeesssaeeeseeeeaaeeeenaaeeseeneaaenees 208 Selecting Epson Scan Settings ssc 2 ceac obese pehachsubeasdencaaudeTensendeactaviaed hale Gadeeatensonvad ecdaebeegtoresaenee 210 eere LaO EEE st recess tetacne edt tel eh eect sense E oper E E eeadt es 210 Sel ctingth Scan Mode ane te seat tde oleae a a ea a E AE eo a eee atte 211 Scanning in Office OG oto as sa Dia ae Oa aie cis aac do etearaes fates Uenanat ecm meee cag faare 211 Available Document Source Settings Office MOdE cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 selecting a Scan Area Office
208. eeeeneceeeessaeessesneeeeeeeaaeeneeaees 235 Available Scan Settings OS X Image Capture eeceeceececcceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeseseeeeeeeeaaeenneaees 237 Scanning Special PrOlSCIS scact shay ieeeccee ntl atockt aaah cguatesaiaats seach deeenencoadaterensdeeatiamtastenedanceed Erenn Esener nenne 238 Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service cceeccceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeetesaaeeeeeneaeees 238 Scanning Multi Page Originals as Separate FileS ceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 240 Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning WiINGOWS 0 ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeneeees 241 BAK MN picasa Secs ceandicecrns cssienoe abate rau eos eacateah vases nauhs tuted ces aualias ai gues T 243 Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine cceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeene 243 Se tting Up Fax PSA OS ssenari n a e a n vn meta a enced atau a aa E ated 249 Setting Up Basic Fax Featuresic c cccicniestccpecaticcnrence capehediiteneuactatachiaded oacletesteeadissane dssoneedilee 249 Selecting Your Country or REGION acc vescceaet ive ol eredentatncashl aoe cnet eashicer denen tated Sbalees dicted eve sheke sees 249 selecting the Date and Time iiinsisectciceheceeceiraiwcetaveeeps adlbedsceuscandaventendsietedeanuasneed aa peeeeceiete 251 Using the Fax Setup Wizard aici ote es Secale cetacean sc eaanisaictas es ones antgay Gepeee tee tena anaz ee esa
209. en by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 465 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product
210. ent Manager and click Uninstall Windows 7 Windows Vista Open the Windows Control Panel utility Select Programs and Features In Classic view select Programs and click Uninstall a program Select Epson Event Manager and click Uninstall Change Windows XP Open the Windows Control Panel utility Double click Add or Remove Programs Select Epson Event Manager and click Change Remove Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Scan then follow any on screen instructions Windows 8 x Windows 7 Windows Vista Select EPSON Scan and click Uninstall Change e Windows XP Select EPSON Scan and click Change Remove Restart your computer then see the Start Here sheet to re install your software Note If you find that re installing your product software does not solve a problem contact Epson Parent topic When to Uninstall Your Product Software Uninstalling Product Software OS X In most cases you do not need to uninstall your product software before re installing it However you can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as described here Note If you find that re installing your product software does not solve a problem contact Epson 1 ete g e a O To download the Uninstaller utility visit the Epson download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads Follow the instructions on the screen to install the Uninstaller utility Quit all applications curren
211. entation Paper Matte Double sided Epson Brochure amp Flyer Paper Matte Double sided Cardstock up to 68 Ib 256 g m Card Stock Note The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer they do not apply to your product s control panel settings Parent topic Loading Paper Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source Control Panel You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the product 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this ii Setup Ink Levels A Hairtenanpe Paper Setup Frint Status Sheet Rework Stolus Em 3 Select Paper Setup Select the paper source you want to change 80 You see a screen like this Paper Cassette aw Paper Size Paper Type 5 Select Paper Size 6 Select the paper size you loaded 7 Select Paper Type 8 Select the paper type you loaded 9 Select OK 10 Select another paper source to change or press ff home to return to exit Paper Type Settings Control Panel Parent topic Loading Paper Paper Type Settings Control Panel Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded Paper type loaded Paper Type setting Plain paper Plain Paper Epson Bright White Paper Letterhead paper Letterhead Recycled paper Recycled Color paper Preprinted paper 81 Epson Presentatio
212. entication error has occurred Check the Server Settings from the Setup menu A communication error has occurred Check the Server Settings or network connection by running a connection check If you selected Off as the authentication method make sure to select None for the email server authentication method The data size exceeds the maximum size for the attached files Increase the Attached File Max Size setting in the scan settings or lower the file size of the scanned image 352 Condition solution The memory is full Retry after other ongoing jobs have finished 327 ee An authentication error occurred Check the Location settings A communication error has occurred Check the Location settings or the network connection A file with the same name already exists in the specified folder Delete the duplicate file or change the file name prefix in File Settings There is not enough storage space available in the specified folder Increase the storage space in the specified folder delete unnecessary files or lower the file size of the scanned image The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist Check the Location settings A communication error occurred while acquiring the destination list Make sure the product is connected to the network correctly There is not enough space available for saving the scanned files in the specified folder Delete unnecessary files from the specified folder The destination could
213. er after printing continuously for a long time the product may have automatically slowed down to protect the print mechanism from overheating or becoming damaged Let the product rest with the power on for 30 minutes then try printing again For the fastest printing select the following settings in your product software Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded Turn on any high speed settings in your product software Select a lower print quality setting Make sure the ink drying time has not been increased for double sided printing Windows Click the Maintenance tab select Extended Settings and select the following settings e High Speed Copies Always Spool RAW Datatype Page Rendering Mode Print as Bitmap Parent topic Solving Problems Printing from a Computer 385 Related references Windows System Requirements OS X System Requirements Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Extended Settings Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Check these sections if you have problems with the layout or content of your printed pages Note When printing using AirPrint the available print settings are different from those covered in this manual See the Apple website for details Inverted Image Too Many Copies Print Blank Pages Print Incorrect Margins on Printou
214. er file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covere
215. eras iki fi gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 487 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2000 Wasabi System
216. erived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTOR S AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTOR S BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2011 Devin J Pohly Portions Copyright 2008 2009 2011 Howard Chu Copyright 2008 Emmanuel Dreyfus All rights reserved Copyright 2009 Jonathan Clarke lt jonathan phillipoux net gt All rights reserved Portions Copyright 2004 by IBM Corporation All rights reserved Copyright 2004 Sang Seok Lim IBM Corp All Rights Reserved Portions Copyright 2007 Micha Szulczy ski All rights reserved Copyright 1991 1996 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans 485 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all c
217. ernet connection has been established 18 icons Description S O a No Wi Fi connection a A Wi Fi network error has occurred or the product is searching for a connection A Wi Fi connection has been established The number of bars indicates the connection s signal strength An Ad hoc connection has been established el A Wi Fi Direct mode connection has been established Ka a A Simple AP mode connection has been established Access to the product s functions are restricted to authorized users Press the icon to log in to the printer You need to enter a user name and password Contact your administrator if you do not know the login information Access to the product s functions are restricted to authorized users and a user is currently logged in Press the icon to log out Parent topic Control Panel Buttons and Lights Status Button Information Press the Status button on the control panel to view the current product and job status Function Description o O Printer Information Displays the status of consumables and any errors that have occurred with the product Select the error from the list to display the error message Job Monitor Displays the current job and any jobs waiting to be processed Job History Displays the job history and any error codes for failed jobs in the history Job Storage Select Inbox to display received faxes stored in the product s history 19 Function Description S Confide
218. ers select Ea To delete the previous character select lt a e To enter numbers or symbols select E To enter a space select l Parent topic Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel Using Presets You can save frequently used copy fax and scan settings as presets This lets you easily reuse them whenever necessary Note Presets can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change presets contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Presets Enter the Administrator password if necessary 22 You see a screen like this Add Hew A No it Auld Hew lt Nt Add Hew Select Add New Select the function for which you want to set up a preset You see the main screen for that function such as the Copy screen 1 Document Sie OE Preview Select the settings you want to save and select Save 23 You see a screen like this 6 Use the displayed keyboard to enter a name for the preset and press 7 Select Save When you copy fax or scan you can use the preset by selecting Presets and selecting your preset from the list Parent topic Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Setting User Feature Restrictions Access Control Using Web Config Access Control Settings you can restrict product features for individual users to prevent misuse of the
219. ers Bold Oblique Univers Light Univers Light Oblique 422 UniversCondensed UniversCondensed Oblique UniversCondensed Bold UniversCondensed Bold Oblique UniversExtended UniversExtended Oblique UniversExtended Bold UniversExtended Bold Oblique Wingdings Parent topic Technical Specifications PCL5 Mode Fonts Scalable Fonts Fontname Family HP equivalent Symbol set FixedPitch 810 Medium Bold Italic Bold Italic FixedPitch 850 Regular Bold Italic Letter Gothic 1 FixedPitch 810 Dark Medium Bold Italic Bold Courier PS 3 Italic Italic Zapf Humanist 601 Medium Bold Italic Bold CG Omega Italic Ribbon 131 Clarendon 701 a Clarendon Condensed 3 Swiss 742 Medium Bold Italic Bold Univers 2 Italic Swiss 742 Condensed Medium Bold Italic Bold Univers Condensed Italic Incised 901 Medium Bold Italic Antique Olive 423 Fontname __ Family___ HP equivalent uoi Do eme Calligraphic 401 401 ss Marigold O Flareserif 821 Medium Extra Bold Albertus Swiss 721 SWM Medium Bold Italic Bold Arial Italic Dutch 801 SWM Medium Bold Italic Bold Times New Italic Swiss 721 SWA Medium Bold Oblique Helvetica 3 Bold Oblique Swiss 721 Narrow Medium Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow 3 SWA Bold Oblique Zapf Calligraphic 801 Medium Bold Italic Bold Palatino 3 SWA Italic Geometric 711 SWA Medium Bold Oblique ITC Avant Garde Gothic 3 Bold Italic Revival 711 SWA Li
220. erved License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as derived from the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work RSA Data Security Inc makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and or software Copyright c 1998 2008 Brian Gladman Worcester UK All rights reserved LICENSE TERMS The redistribution and use of this software with or without changes is allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that 1 source code distributions include the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 binary distributions include the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation 480 3 the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written permission DISCLAIMER This software is provided as
221. esaete ea sbedacbatiad otelies pedal cede eacaguncTeaderdeavlalasetreat apenas 66 Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot ccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenseeeeeeeeeeees 69 Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot ccccccecseceeeeeseeeeeeeaceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeesaaeseesneeeeeeeaaeenneas 73 Paper Loading Capacity tie a jeace ee eect eect A So Ne See aa hie te Meee ce uaa ccc rates 75 Available Epson Papers ninani e E E a EER N a ieaS 77 Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software ssssessseeenenessneresserrnettrnnetrnnrernnnrsrnnrnserrnseern nnet 79 Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source Control Panel ccccccsssceeceeeessesseeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeeees 80 Paper Type Settings Control Panel s cccstesetesciiaetataieiadaaeieeteeaaieireiataclench ede ae 81 Selecting Default Paper Settings Administrator ccccececceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeneeaes 82 Selecting the Default Printer Settings ie i25c sees esas Seansetc iy nedas boeteta tomas ia ceeee dala beat od ease Qaheepavenherres ted 82 Paper Source Settings Oplons 4 cc fo Be uee esas ae cas ducts educa ana Secntaseethugavaaxaesesa see eae amas cade apeivaee 84 Setting the Universal Print Settings sic cctecseceteeecedisententiicinigs backhoe neeean ieee eeweecieeeeaeds 84 Universal Print Settings Options ccccececccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee teases eesaaeeeesaaaeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeas 85
222. ese settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 84 You see this screen ie Cus bi Selup Ink Levels Maitenanpe Paper Setup Print Status Sheet Melwark Status 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary You see this screen fy Sistem Adninistration Printer Settings Connon Settings Wie Fl Heterork Settings Epson Connect Servines iGoogle Choad Print Services 4 Select Universal Print Settings 5 Adjust the settings as necessary 6 When you are finished press the ff home button to exit Universal Print Settings Options Parent topic Selecting Default Paper Settings Administrator Universal Print Settings Options Select the universal print setting options you want to use for your printed jobs 85 Universal Print Available settings Description Settings option Top Offset Ss y O Adjust the top or left margin Lett Offset o Top Offset in Adjust the top or left margin of the back page when Back performing double sided printing Left Offset in Back Check Paper On Select On to check the paper width before printing This Width prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper when the paper size settings are incorrect but may reduce the printing speed Dry Time Select
223. essary 2 Select Setup ink Lewes wers dt en a Pe Stuy Maintbenance Paper Setup Pr Paetae Network Status ly 253 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary Jisten Administration Printer Settings Common Settings e Wi Fi Hetaork Settings Enson Connect Servines Gongle Cloud Print Services ly Scroll down and select Fax Settings Scroll down and select Fax Setting Wizard The Fax Setting Wizard screen appears Select Start On the Fax Header screen use the displayed keypad to enter the sender name for your fax source such as your name or a business name You can enter up to 40 characters On the Your Phone Number screen use the displayed keypad to enter your fax number up to 20 characters Note The name and phone number in the fax header identifies the source of the faxes you send On the Distinctive Ring Setting screen do one of the following e If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company select Proceed Select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes or select On Go to step 12 If you do not have a distinctive ring service select Skip and go to the next step Note Distinctive ring services allows you to have several phone numbers on one phone line Each number is assigned a different ring pattern You can use one number for voice calls and another for fax call
224. et by clicking the Add Remove Presets button 1 Click the Main or More Options tab You see the available Printing Presets on the left Main More Options Maintenance Printing Presets Add Remove Presets Document Fast Document Standard Quality Document High Quality 2 Document 2 Sided EE Document 2 Up Eto Document 2 Sided with 2 Up Document Fast Grayscale Document Grayscale Document 11x 17in He af af af A ead ep Show Settings Reset Defaults 125 4 5 Place your cursor over one of the Printing Presets to view its list of settings Click on a preset to change its settings or use any of the available options on the screen to control your printing presets To choose a preset for printing select it Click OK Parent topic Printing with Windows Selecting Extended Settings Windows You can select additional settings that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product 1 2 3 Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar Select Printer Settings Click the Maintenance tab You see the maintenance options AVA Prat read Alignment 126 4 Click the Extended Settings button You see this window Offset Port Teo J table EPSON Status Monitor 3 Jed Paper Width Before Printing Thick Paper and Envelopes Det Gen Paper Separenor Page Feont left Always Sood RAM Datatype Page Rendering
225. etting Fix Photo Improves the color contrast and sharpness of flawed photos Note Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include faces For this to work both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject s face If your photo includes a face with an intentional color cast such as a statue you may want to turn off Fix Photo to retain the special color effects 122 ICM Lets you manage color using installed color printing profiles No Color Adjustment Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your application software Parent topic Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Image Options and Additional Settings Windows You can select any of the Image Options and Additional Settings to customize your print Some options may be pre selected or unavailable depending on other settings you have chosen Image Options Emphasize Text Adjusts the weight of printed text to increase readability Emphasize Thin Lines Adjusts the weight of printed lines to increase visibility Edge Smoothing Smooths jagged edges in low resolution images such as screen captures or images from the Web Fix Red Eye Reduces or removes red eye in photos Print Text in Black Prints colored text in black For Color Text Prints colored text on a background pattern or underlined For Color Graphs and Images Prints colored graphics and images with
226. etup Related tasks Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel Printing a Network Status Sheet Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network try these solutions e Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network Verify connection using your product control panel e Check if your network name SSID contains non ASCII characters Your product cannot display non ASCII characters e Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network If necessary reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again 1 Reset your product s network settings to their factory defaults 2 Windows only uninstall your product software 3 Initialize your router following the instructions in your router documentation Note If you are reading these instructions online you will lose your Internet connection when you initialize your router so note the next step before initializing it 4 Download your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here sheet e If you have replaced your router reinstall your product software to connect to the new router Note If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router set the router to operate in dual band 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz mode See your router documentation for instructions Parent topic Solving Network Problems 360 Rel
227. evices and Printers e Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers e Windows Vista Click select Control Panel and click Printer under Hardware and Sound Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Or open the Control Panel select Printers and Other Hardware if necessary and Printers and Faxes 2 Right click your product name select Printing Preferences and select your product name again if necessary 3 Click the Maintenance tab 4 Click the Extended Settings button 5 Select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 then click OK 384 6 Click the Monitoring Preferences button 7 Click the checkbox for the option that adds the shortcut icon to the taskbar 8 Click OK to close the open program windows Parent topic Solving Problems Printing from a Computer Printing is Slow If printing becomes slow try these solutions Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system If you are printing a high resolution image you may need more than the minimum requirements If necessary increase your system s memory If you are using Windows 7 close the Devices and Printers window before you print Make sure Quiet Mode is turned off Clear space on your hard drive or run a defragmentation utility to free up existing space Close any programs you are not using when you print If your product is connected to a USB hub connect it directly to your computer instead If printing becomes slow
228. f 4 For the Paper Source setting select where you loaded the paper you want to print on 5 Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting 113 10 11 12 13 14 15 Select the orientation of your document Note If you are printing an envelope select Landscape Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting Note The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper Check the paper type settings list for details Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use Select a Color option To print a color document or photo select the Color setting e To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray select the Black Grayscale setting To print on both sides of the paper select the 2 Sided Printing checkbox and select the options you want To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper or print one image on multiple sheets of paper select one of the settings in the Multi Page menu and select the printing options you want To print multiple copies and arrange their print order select the Copies options To preview your job before printing select Print Preview To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs select Job Arranger Lite To reduce noise during printing when you select Plain Paper Bright White Paper select On in the Quiet Mode menu Paper Source Options Windows Print Q
229. f you disable this feature it remains disabled until you install a new black ink cartridge Parent topic Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Replacing the Maintenance Box Make sure you have a new maintenance box before you begin Caution Do not reuse a maintenance box that has been removed and left uninstalled for more than a week Keep the maintenance box away from direct sunlight 1 Make sure the product is not printing 326 2 Remove the new maintenance box from its package Caution Do not touch the green chip on the maintenance box Do not remove the film on the box or ink may leak 3 Open the rear cover 1 D1 4 Grasp the maintenance box as shown and pull it out of its holder sl Note Do not tilt the used maintenance box or take it apart 327 Warning If ink gets on your skin wash it thoroughly with soap and water If ink gets into your eyes flush them immediately with water If ink gets into your mouth spit it out and see a doctor right away Keep the maintenance box out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink 5 Place the used maintenance box in the plastic bag that came with the new maintenance box Seal the bag and dispose of it carefully 6 Insert the new maintenance box into the holder and push it all the way in 7 Close the rear cover 1 D1 Parent topic Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Related concepts Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and
230. f you want to use a scan job that you created instead select it from the Job list in the Document Capture Pro or Document Capture window click the LJ Start Job button and skip the rest of these steps Select any displayed scan settings you want to use Note See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details If you want to select detailed scan settings do one of the following Windows Click Detailed Settings Select any displayed scan settings you want to use and click OK 205 e OS X If you installed Epson Scan close the Scan Settings window open the Scan menu at the top of the screen and select Displays the EPSON Scan Setup Screen Click the Scan icon Select any displayed scan settings you want to use and click OK 6 Click Scan You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture Pro or Document Capture window 7 Check the scanned images and edit them as necessary 8 Click one of the Destination icons to choose where to save your scanned file Note You may need to click the arrow next to the icons in order to see all of them The available icons may vary depending on the software version you are using 9 Select settings as necessary then click OK Send or Print to save the scanned file Parent topic Starting a Scan Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon You can start the Epson Scan program to select scan settings sc
231. fax number or selecting the number from either the contact list or fax history Note You can send a black and white fax to up to 200 recipients at a time or send a color fax to one recipient at a time If your recipient s fax machine does not print in color your fax is automatically sent in black and white Note The product can queue up to 50 black and white fax jobs You can check or cancel fax jobs in the queue using the Status Menu 1 Place your original on the product for faxing 2 Press the home button if necessary 283 3 Select Fax Contacts History Oni Haak fr Preset Note To fax a double sided document place your document in the ADF and turn on the ADF 2 Sided setting You cannot fax double sided documents in color 4 Doone of the following to select fax recipients Manually enter a fax number Press the Enter a Fax Number field and enter a fax number Press when done To add another fax number repeat the same steps You can also use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter a fax number Note If direct dialing has been restricted you can only select the number from the contact list or fax history If necessary enter an outside line access code such as 9 at the beginning of the fax number If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting enter the pound sign instead of the code Select from the contact list Select Contacts to display the contact list screen Select th
232. fornia All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Copyright c 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission
233. from a Computer Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Solving Print Quality Problems Solving Scanning Problems Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Solving Faxing Problems Solving USB Flash Drive Problems When to Uninstall Your Product Software Where to Get Help Checking for Software Updates Periodically it s a good idea to check Epson s support website for free updates to your product software Visit the driver download site at U S downloads or Canadian downloads Windows Your printer software automatically checks for updates You can also manually update the software by selecting Software Update here e Accessing the Windows Desktop and right clicking the product icon in the Windows taskbar e On the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window 348 You can also update the software by selecting EPSON Software Updater in the EPSON or EPSON Software program group accessible by the Start button or on the Start or Apps screens depending on your version of Windows e OS X You can manually update the software by opening the Applications gt Epson Software folder and selecting EPSON Software Updater Parent topic Solving Problems Product Status Messages You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages on its LCD screen You can also check for errors by pressing the i Status button to display the Status Menu Note If the screen is dark press the screen to wake the product from sleep
234. g can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the home button if necessary 249 2 Select Setup ie Ei e bi Selup Ink Levels Maitenanpe Paper Setup Print Status Sheet Melwark Status 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary eee System Administration Printer PrinterSettings Connon Settings Connon Settings o Wi Fi Hebaork Settings pEi Connect pains Gougie Cloud Print Services 4 Select Common Settings 5 Scroll down and select Country Region 6 Scroll up or down if necessary and select your country or region You see a confirmation screen 7 Ifthe setting is correct select Yes If not select No and retry Note Changing the country or region restores the fax settings to the default settings Parent topic Setting Up Basic Fax Features 250 Selecting the Date and Time Before faxing select the current date time and daylight saving phase in your area and choose your preferred date and time format Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the f home button if necessary 2 Select Setup ii Setup Ink Levels Mainben ance Paper Selup Print Status Sheet Helwork Stalus
235. ght Demi Bold Light ITC Bookman 3 Italic Demi Bold Italic Century 702 SWA Medium Bold Italic Bold New Century Schoolbook Italic Dutch 801 SWA Medium Bold Italic Bold Times 3 Italic Chancery 801 Medium ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Same Italic er A Symbol SWM SWM I sd Symbot sd a a DingDingsSWA TC Zapf Dingbats 6 symbol SWA Symbol 424 Fontname Family HP equivalent Symbol set Miryam BT Medium Bold Italic Koufi BT Medium Bold Koufi ooo e Naskh BT Medium Bold Naskh i e Ryadh BT Medium Bold Ryadh ao al Bitmap Font Line Printer Symbol set 9 OCR Barcode Bitmap Font Fontname fram Seymor i O C E C E Note Depending on the print density or quality and color of the paper the OCR Barcode Bitmap fonts may not be readable Print a sample and check for readability before printing large quantities Parent topic Technical Specifications PCL6 Mode Fonts Scalable Fonts Fontname Family HP equivalent Symbol set FixedPitch 810 Medium Bold Italic Bold Italic FixedPitch 850 Regular Bold Italic Letter Gothic FixedPitch 810 Dark Medium Bold Italic Bold Italic 425 Fontname Family HP equivalent Symbol set Dutch 801 Medium Bold Italic Bold CG Times 2 Italic Zapf Humanist 601 Medium Bold Italic Bold CG Omega o Ribbon 131 131 I ss Coronet E Clarendon 701 S Clarendon Condensed Swiss 742 Medium Bold Italic Bold Univers Italic Swiss 74
236. h a Package if it has not been modified or has been modified in accordance with the wishes of the Copyright Holder as specified below Copyright Holder is whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights for the package You is you if you re thinking about copying or distributing this Package Distribution fee is a fee you charge for providing a copy of this Package to another party Freely Available means that no fee is charged for the right to use the item though there may be fees involved in handling the item It also means that recipients of the item may redistribute it under the same conditions they received it 1 You may make and give away verbatim copies of the source form of the Standard Version of this Package without restriction provided that you duplicate all of the original copyright notices and associated disclaimers 2 You may apply bug fixes portability fixes and other modifications derived from the Public Domain or those made Freely Available or from the Copyright Holder A Package modified in such a way shall still be considered the Standard Version 3 You may otherwise modify your copy of this Package in any way provided that you insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how and when you changed that file and provided that you do at least ONE of the following a place your modifications in the Public Domain or otherwise make them Freely Available such as by posting said modifications to Usene
237. hat can be modified and combined with other print jobs select Job Arranger Lite Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Related references Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Paper Source Options Windows Print Quality Options Windows Multi Page Printing Options Windows 159 Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Epson Universal Print Driver Windows You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More Options tab Document Sre Letter 1 2 x 11m Output Paper Same as Doosrent Soe Reduce Enlarge Document Watermart Features Confidential Job Addbond Settings Rotate 180 Note For more information about a setting right click it and select Help 1 To change the size of your printed document or photo select the Reduce Enlarge Document checkbox and select one of these sizing options e Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded Select the size of the your document or photo as the Document Size setting and the size of your paper as the Output Paper setting If you want to center your image on the paper select the Center option e Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage Select the percentage in the menu 160 5 Select one of the following Color Correction options e Select Automatic to automaticall
238. he free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice 446 This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that ve
239. he Fax Utility OS Xicscciicessedsioicneets MatearederthhaiiGedaundenteeeel Mananmeee 294 POO OIM INC Faxe Sa cc ces eset cet cece aah cca eect cect ice as aut Meat ok ce ch ace ete ate tem ence ocean et aed epics dee eeten dade 297 FA FROCO DEON ccc cearasantsiceendececshecraad kee Aven tala r e aeaa a aAa aaa AT aaea E aa EA nad AAAA A TNE 297 Receiving Faxes Automatically nnnssnensssssssnrnnesssnnrrrnsssteessessntrtnrrrnnnrtrtrrununonnnnnnnnsnureeennneeenee 298 R ceiving Faxes Manually ssanie aaae ea aeii eaaa ia sd ues iaki aaeain 298 Forwarding Received RAxeS iii deyipde Seidl cae Reales SbcantDibey Sed gednhs eda eaetd anette Desens bene eeetaee eda 299 Receiving a Fax by Polling i 0 ai acc ie nesses a ot Se a a ee a aaa ee nas ee coe Sager 301 Viewing a Fax on the LCD Sereeitacsitcneicutassreccuste dated tuaneltenMiihie ceataneanaiuas need Setebanende 301 Checking Fax Status somen e aa a a ERRE 302 Printing Fax Report S aenn annere puck ety a ra ia cay otk A aA E a aA TAT ened aes EESAN 303 Fax Report Options oe rmeeaare pa a aaea SE e A TE Aa E e EREEREER 303 Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product ccccsseecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeneeesneeeeeseeseeeeenseeeeesseeneneeneenes 305 lnserting a USB Flash Drive serosoa ee dam attest taka oda a a dade a Mia a 305 USB Device Photo File Specifications i 2issccseciechasiensesdandeiasahael ainenathedideneeeiishawreleed 305 Removing a USB Flash Dry Gases cesses eee cx syei esas tas
240. he Operation Time Out Setting cc eeeecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeessneeeeeenaaaeees 28 Product Panes OCA OIG ernir ee eect dh eG seta nee ete Sates atone cee sel dm celta aan Aas haat 29 Produ t Parts RONG es a a ata a aana ue eset A Sadat a a Medias 30 daoo Ure meaa EO e E E E A A E E T 33 PrOGUGE Parts Batkeni ar seinen tania ot Ot E EEA TE AAA E NOAE Oa 35 Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeneeeeesenaeeeene 36 Changing the Eco Mode Settings amp cieesc cesecnzs caiedsoneesesereachet is ote sgceun ao taiee av eeesee cieceenadoeeeetttaratene 36 Changing the Sleep Timer SeningS s ccceaensahs etethscectarianPadecnde tate deed aie eadereieclerasiteatnateg 37 Changing the Power Off Timer Settings cccceeeescceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeesnaaeeeeeeaaaeeeesaas 38 Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and MOre ccccccceseescceeeeeesessstneeeeeeeseees 39 BISING EPSON Erie lie MIM e Seagate eek Red eed et AS a ae fees See eA A ae ea 39 Using the Epson Print Mobile App lt crtics sinc ceinds tote eaee tet dee date oes cee date ha tuted oceerctlec la eeauetaegs fi 40 Using Epson Remote Print cticatessepccyiotienstsnqcuiabiadadeys itucaetieanaeiieradtetead bananas ieieenaee dd nid AKEE Eas 40 Using EPSon scan tO Cloud ti reae ex one i aaaea E E aaa e E es vies weedeat EARE 41 Using AIP Fe sirieni a A a N Ea e N era
241. he date and time are set correctly before using this feature 1 Place your original on the product for scanning Note To scan a double sided document place it in the ADF and select the 2 Sided setting 2 Press the ff home button if necessary 3 Select Scan 196 You see a screen like this Scan to Emai Hetwork Folder TP Bemar Devine 4 Select Network Folder FTP You see a screen like this 22 Folderi FTP 5 Doone of the following e Select Contacts and choose a saved location Select Enter Location then select the Communication Mode Location and other settings Note Enter the folder path name for the Location setting in one of the following formats depending on the Communication Mode setting you selected e SMB host name folder FTP ftp host name folder name 6 Select Format to choose the file format for your scan 197 7 Select Menu and select File Settings Change the Filename Prefix if necessary then press the 5 back button to return to the Folder FTP screen 8 Select Preset to save your scan settings Note Presets can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 9 Press one of the buttons Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location Parent topic Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Related references Control Panel Scanning Options Related tasks Enter
242. he ff home button if necessary 289 3 Select Fax Contacts History On Haak Oe Preview she Preset 4 Select Menu 5 Select Store Fax Data and select On 6 If you need to change any fax settings select Menu select Fax Send Settings and select your settings 7 Press the B amp W button Your document is scanned stored and briefly previewed 8 When you are ready to send the document press the i Status button You see a screen like this W Status Menu al Confidential Job 0 9 Select Job Monitor 10 Select Communication Job 11 Select the stored fax job you want to send 290 12 Select Send View and select Send You can store only one document at a time Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document You can also delete a stored document from the Status Menu Parent topic Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone If you have connected a telephone to the EXT port on your product you can send a fax by dialing the fax number from the connected telephone If the recipient s phone number and fax number are the same you can speak to the recipient before sending the fax 1 Place your original on the product for faxing Press the ft home button if necessary Dial the fax number from the connected telephone Speak to the recipient if neces
243. he product may not be able to receive faxes Contact your service provider for assistance e Check your inbox and delete faxes after reading or printing them If the inbox is full the product cannot receive faxes e If you cannot send faxes at a specified time make sure the date and time are set correctly on the product e If you cannot receive A3 size faxes make sure you selected the correct paper size setting for the paper source containing the A3 size paper Also be sure to enable the paper source to receive faxes as the Auto Select Settings option Note If your product is connected to a VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol phone line keep in mind that fax machines are designed to work over analog phone lines Epson cannot guarantee that fax transmission will work when using VoIP If your phone line includes voice mail answering services calls or faxes may be inadvertently received by your voice mail service Parent topic Solving Faxing Problems Related references Status Menu Error Codes Related tasks Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Using the Fax Setup Wizard Selecting the Line Type Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Receiving Faxes Automatically Printing Fax Reports Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen Related topics Loading Paper Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product If you cannot receive faxes when a telephone is connected to your product try these solutions e Make sure your teleph
244. his license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Libra
245. ht horizontal bands you may need to align the print head Note Banding may also occur if your print head nozzles need cleaning Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Aligning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility Parent topic Adjusting Print Quality Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel You can align the print head using the control panel on your product 1 Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen 2 Load afew sheets of plain paper in the product 3 Press the f home button if necessary 337 Select Setup Select Maintenance You see a screen like this Print Head Nozzle Check NN Ce Print Hend Annet O heor Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Thick Paner Paper Guile Cleaning Select Print Head Alignment Do one of the following e If vertical lines are misaligned select Ruled Line Alignment e If your printouts look blurry select Vertical Alignment e If you see horizontal bands at regular intervals select Horizontal Alignment Follow the on screen instructions to print an alignment sheet Note Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns Check the printed patterns on the alignment sheet and do one of the following e If you printed a ruled line alignment sheet select the number representing the pattern with the least misaligned vertical line 338 e If you printed a vertical alignment sheet select the number
246. ication are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems Inc and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of
247. ications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the approp
248. ice calls you can also set your product to receive faxes manually This allows you to check for a fax tone using the telephone and press a button on your product to receive the fax Make sure to load paper in your product and select your fax settings before receiving a fax 297 Note If you run out of paper during fax printing load more paper and press the button indicated on your product s LCD screen to continue Parent topic Receiving Faxes Receiving Faxes Automatically To receive faxes automatically make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto the default setting for the product To change the Receive Mode if necessary select Setup gt System Administration gt Fax Settings gt Receive Settings gt Receive Mode If an answering machine is connected make sure the product s Rings to Answer setting is set higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call For example if the answering machine is set to pick up on the fourth ring set the product to pick up on the fifth ring or later Parent topic Receiving Faxes Related references Receive Settings Fax Related tasks Receiving Faxes Manually Receiving Faxes Manually You can set up your product to receive faxes manually by setting the Receive Mode to Manual This lets you check for a fax tone on the connected telephone before receiving a fax 1 To change the Receive Mode select Setup gt System Administration gt Fax Settings gt Receiv
249. ick and select Devices and Printers Right click your product name and select Printing Preferences e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound right click your product name and select Printing Preferences Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click your product name and select Printing Preferences 178 You see the printer settings window Layout Paper Qualty Onentation Print on Both Sides 4 None Page Order Front to Back Page Format Pages per Sheet 1 Booklet 2 Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs 3 Click OK These settings are now the defaults selected for printing You can still change them as needed for printing in any program session Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X You can print with the PostScript PS3 printer software using any OS X printing program as described in these sections Installing the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software OS X Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X Selecting Page Setup Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X 179 Selecting Print Layout Options PostScript Printer Software OS X Sizing Printed Images PostScript Printer Software OS
250. ie 411 Automatic Document Feeder ADF Specifications ssssneesserrsssrrrssrrnrrettnrrrnnnersrrressrrnnsrrrnnernnnt 412 Fax Specification S eere a eaaa Ee EE eaea r reae N Ea aeea E geeact ipacntdes 412 Paper Specifications seperi eaa a a aaa a Ea E aa A Ae eE a aaa a Ra iaei 413 Printable Area Specifications ax acs ce ceeds reed cseociet yes boentenitedanets Seutacelelalees cattet eee eegethceedaoe cease 415 Ink Galinldge SD SCIIGAL OMG seins sisi tee Bilas ernest a e EO E a a Ue santa ene bebe E PIA 416 Dimension Specifications 23 575 eas sees e ect eh ed ae Poke NS ladle Oe ae eRe eee treet 416 Electrical Specifications fir cicitccedate numer ne Dunne cade ee e a eea i 417 Environmental Specifications sciicc ccihenetohtietiadseaadsl veel didlebewlaln i dineeie isda ede diadeld 418 Interface SPSCIICATONS cas cece eves esorare aAa enaa SAAE EEA EEEE EESAN EERE EEE EEEa 418 External USB Device Specifications ya cae niieeeniciect acest seeccetaesetndeiaadsedertheeninnieinedaeean 419 Network Interface Specifications ccecceeeesecceeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaaaeeesaaaeeseseeaeeeeesaaeeesesneeees 419 Safety and Approvals Specifications i ccicc cies cpeesnnces eves beeeenedeeseeedevgaeeetteemlieeeesseleniie ns deaeensLecmmadenss 420 PS3 Mode POMS seeren raea eaea AAA A aE EE aS rE e EA EEE ARTSA Eei EAS A ESSERE RENEE 421 PGES Mode FORS iirrcrei naea RE sd EE R ARE EEE AEE RR 423 GEC BAC HORS cise E E te seca E ence eae E deg
251. ing Basic Print Settings WiNdOWS 00 ccccececceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaeeseeeaaaeeees 112 Paper Source Options WINKOWS sie c c0 ceseceepeee tteeias dececeusecleneeveneaenecdolanpadeureceeuehelteesureeebedinaeks 115 Print Quality Options WINGOWS i ic Joceretaccd hens ceetbageacteteatedadesauhecateedonendslantels Macatee ack 115 Multi Page Printing Options WiNGOWS ceeeeseeeeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeseseeaeeeeesaaeeeneneees 116 Selecting Double sided Printing Settings WiINGOWS cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneneeeees 116 Double sided Printing Options WiNGOWS ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeeeeeteaaeetenenees 119 Print Density Adjustments WiINndOWS s 40 ccsencanetele cae on Geeta edn oranda ee oes 119 Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options WiINdOWS ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 Custom Color Correction Options WiINGOWG cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeeenaaeeeene 122 Image Options and Additional Settings WiINdOWS ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeneeees 123 Header Footer Settings WiIndOWS cccecccceeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceaeeeeeeaaaeeeeaaeeseeaaseeeesaaeenseneeees 124 Selecting a Printing Preset WIMGdOWS 24 353 s scaeseecodiou Shea iagoeenei seo x aaeasie Rina dew oel eb omantenees 125 Selecting Extended Settings WiNGOWS c c
252. ing Characters on the LCD Screen Selecting the Date and Time Creating Contacts for Scanning Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Control Panel Scanning Options Select the options you want to use for scanning Note Not all options or settings may be available depending on the Scan to option selected Scan to setting Available options Subject i e Lets you enter a subject for your email Filename Prefix Pe Lets you enter a filename prefix for your scanned file 198 Scan to setting Available options Location Communication Lets you select Network Folder SMB or FTP Mode Location Lets you enter a folder path in which to save scanned images Lets you enter a user name for the selected folder path Lets you enter a password for the selected folder path Connection Mode Lets you select the connection mode Port Number Lets you enter a port number JPEG Select for photos PDF sd Select for documents TIFF Single Page Select for scanned files that you can print from a E ev iy TIFF documents are scanned Resolution mem a oepa Scan Area Select the page size for documents Aa Executive Auto Cropping Select for photos with dark edges Select for most photos lof sd Lets you scan 2 sided originals placed in the ADF If you select On you can also select the fon Binding Direction 199 Scan to setting Available options Document Type Specifies the type of original
253. ing TCP IP make sure the product s IP address is set correctly for your network If your network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP set the IP address manually Make sure your computer and product are both using the same wireless network 361 If network printing is slow print a network status sheet and check the signal strength If it is poor place your product closer to your router or access point Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven 2 4 GHz cordless phone or large metal object such as a filing cabinet Note If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router set the router to operate in dual band 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz mode See your router documentation for instructions Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is preventing printing from a device over the network See your router or access point documentation for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function If you are connecting the product via Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS and the Wi Fi icon on your product s LCD is not lit make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is connected is on or flashing If the link LED is off try the following e Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your r
254. ings menu If you turn on Eco Mode 2 sided copying is selected by default The Eco Mode setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Eco Mode Enter the administrator password if necessary 36 You see a screen like this Eco Mode a T On Sleep Timer Select On Select Configure Change any settings as necessary Select OK to exit Parent topic Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings Related tasks Changing the Sleep Timer Settings Dak w Changing the Sleep Timer Settings You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance The Sleep Timer setting in Eco Mode overrides this Sleep Timer setting Press the ff home button if necessary Select Setup Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary Select Common Settings Select Sleep Timer aeoo N 37 You see a screen like this fy Sleep Timer O F4AOdinwles 6 Doone of the following e Press the or icons to reduce or increase the number of minutes e Press the number of minutes on the LCD screen select the number of minutes from the on screen key
255. ings window Ato Select Letter 8 1 2 11n Potrat Landscape Plain Paper Bright Wevte Paper Standard Color on Note For more information about a setting right click it and select Help 158 10 11 12 13 14 For the Paper Source setting select where you loaded the paper you want to print on Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting Note You can also select the User Defined setting to create a custom paper size Select the orientation of your document Note If you are printing an envelope select Landscape Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting Note The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper Check the paper type settings list for details Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use Select a Color option To print a color document or photo select the Color setting To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray select the Grayscale setting To print on both sides of the paper select one of the 2 Sided Printing settings To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper or print one image on multiple sheets of paper select one of the settings in the Multi Page menu and select the printing options you want To print multiple copies and arrange their print order select the Copies options To preview your job before printing select Print Preview To save your print job as a project t
256. int Select the forwarding destination from the contact list Note Select View to sort your contacts by the printer s features You can select up to 5 forwarding destinations When you are finished selecting your forwarding destinations select Proceed Confirm the displayed forwarding destinations are correct and select Close Select Options When Forwarding Failed Select the option you want to occur when received faxes fail to be forwarded print the faxes or save them in the printer s inbox If you are forwarding to an email address you can specify the subject email by selecting Email Subject to Forward Note If you are forwarding faxes to a shared folder on the network or an email address you can test if fax forwarding was set up correctly by sending a scanned image to the destination using the scan to email or scan to network folder ftp option If you are forwarding faxes to a shared folder on the network you can set up FAX Utility to notify you whenever a new fax is received Parent topic Receiving Faxes Related tasks Selecting the Date and Time Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Related topics Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups 300 Receiving a Fax by Polling You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine such as a fax information service Note You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance Press the ff home button if necessary
257. int amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies 3 Select Driver or Options You see a screen like this General U5 Supply Levels Utility To take full advantage of your printer s options confirm that they are accurately shown here For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the printer s documentation Thick paper and envelopes Skip Blank Page Quiet Mode Permit temporary black printing High Speed Printing Warning Notifications Establish bidirectional communication zle 9 s gig glg Lower Cassette Cancel OK 4 Select the number of optional cassette units installed for the Lower Cassette setting 5 Click OK The optional paper cassettes are now enabled Parent topic Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software OS X 103 Placing Originals on the Product Follow the instructions here to place your original documents or photos on the product Caution Do not place anything on top of your product or use its cover as a writing surface to avoid damaging it Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass You can place originals up to this size on the scanner glass A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches 297 x 420 mm 1 Open the document cover 2 Pl
258. inting 129 All document settings 1 Doone of the following e Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click your product and select Printer properties e Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click your product and select Printer properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware and Sound then right click your product and select Properties Windows XP Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Right click your product and select Properties 2 Click the Optional Settings tab Note You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group permissions in the Security tab 3 Click Driver Settings 130 You see this window 4 Select the checkbox for the function or functions you want to lock To lock all print settings select All Document Settings 5 Under Advanced Settings select the setting you want for each selected function 6 Click OK Administrator Lock Settings Parent topic Printing with Windows Administrator Lock Settings Select the settings you want to use for locking print functions 131 Printing function Available settings Various data items Lets you select the data to use for the pattern or prohibit anti copy patterns Add Delete Lets you add or delete a customized anti copy pattern Lets you select the arrangement
259. ional Paper Cassette Unit Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit If paper has jammed in any of the optional paper cassettes follow the steps here to clear the jam 1 Cancel the print job if necessary 2 Open rear cover E on the optional paper cassette unit with the jammed paper 375 3 Carefully remove any paper jammed inside i ye gt 3 S D V A A 4 Close rear cover E 5 Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages If you still see a paper jam message check the other paper jam solutions Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F 376 Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F If you have problems with document jams in the automatic document feeder ADF follow the steps here to clear the jam 1 Cancel the print job if necessary 2 Remove your originals from the ADF 3 Raise the lever and open the ADF cover 377 Oo Carefully remove any jammed pages 7 Lower the document cover 379 8 Raise the AD
260. ions Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Selecting Maintenance Options Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Selecting Default Print Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Locking Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Adding Network Printers Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Parent topic Printing from a Computer Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows The Epson Universal Print Driver supports multiple printer languages such as PCL and ESC P R and can be installed on a Windows computer Note Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before installing the printer software 1 Download the EPSON Universal Print Driver from epson com support wf8590 2 Double click the downloaded package 152 3 Follow the on screen instructions until you see the screen below Detect the panter end automatically configure the port ls the printer connected via a network az Mo USB connection C Set Default of Printer Control Language to PCLE ae 4 Select Yes Network connection and click OK Note Select the Set Default of Printer Control Language to PCL6 checkbox if you want to set the default printer language to PCL6 Leave this option deselected to set the printer language to ESC P R You can change this setting later as needed 153 After the software finishes searching for products you see a screen like this O Ad
261. istinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally 455 NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE
262. ity a variable amount of ink remains in the cartridge after the replace cartridge indicator comes on Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers Parent topic Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers Use these part numbers when you order or purchase a new maintenance box or ink cartridges Maintenance box part number T671200 Note For best printing results use up a cartridge within 6 months after installing it Part number Extra High capacity 748XXL 748XXL 748XXL 748XXL Parent topic Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box 319 Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges Make sure you have your replacement cartridges handy before you begin You must install new cartridges immediately after removing the old ones Caution Leave your old cartridges in the printer until you are ready to replace them to prevent the print head nozzles from drying out Do not open ink cartridge packages until you are ready to install the ink Cartridges are vacuum packed to maintain reliability 1 Turn on your product 2 Ifan ink cartridge is low or expended a message appears on your product and on your computer screen Note which cartridges need to be replaced 3 Open the front cover The ink cartridge pops out slightly 5 Pull the ink cartridge out of the slot Note Dispose of used cartridges carefully Do not take the used cartridge apart or try t
263. ive Problems Related references Interface Specifications Related topics Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive When to Uninstall Your Product Software If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re install your software follow the instructions for your operating system Uninstalling Product Software Windows Uninstalling Product Software OS X Parent topic Solving Problems Uninstalling Product Software Windows You can uninstall and then re install your product software to solve certain problems 1 Turn off the product 2 Disconnect any interface cables 3 Doone of the following Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Programs gt Programs and Features Select the uninstall option for your Epson product then select Uninstall Change Note If you see a User Account Control window click Yes or Continue Select your product again if necessary then select OK and click Yes to confirm the uninstallation Windows other versions Click or Start and select All Programs or Programs Select EPSON select your product then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall Note If you see a User Account Control window click Yes or Continue In the next window select your product and click OK Then follow any on screen instructions 407 6 Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Event Manager then follow any on screen instructions e Windows 8 x Select Epson Ev
264. k an empty entry Note To edit an entry select it and change the information To delete an entry select it and press the Delete key on your keyboard 6 Doone of the following To create a speed dial entry select Speed Dial enter a name and fax number and click OK e To create a group dial entry select Group Dial enter a name select your desired fax numbers and click OK 7 Repeat the previous steps as necessary to add all your speed dial or group dial entries 8 Toimport entries from your MacAddress book click the E icon 9 When you are finished click the icon to save the entries to your product s memory Parent topic Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Related topics Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel 282 Sending Faxes See these sections to send faxes using your product Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility Windows Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility OS X Parent topic Faxing Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel See these sections to send faxes using the product s control panel Sending a Fax Using the Keypad Contact List or History Fax Sending Options Sending a Fax at a Specified Time Sending a Fax on Demand Sending a Stored Fax Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone Parent topic Sending Faxes Sending a Fax Using the Keypad Contact List or History You can send a fax from your product control panel by entering the
265. k and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of thi
266. king 44 Wi Fi or Wired Networking See these sections to use your product on a Wi Fi or wired network Wi Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup Wi Fi Direct Mode Setup Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Printing a Network Status Sheet Changing or Updating Network Connections Wi Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network 1 Epson product 2 Wireless router or access point 45 Computer with a wireless interface Computer Internet OOA Ww Ethernet cable used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel Parent topic Wi Fi or Wired Networking Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel To install your product on a wireless network follow the instructions on the Start Here sheet and install the necessary software by downloading it from the Epson website The installer program guides you through network setup Note Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings Epson is not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period We recommend that you make your own backup or print ou
267. ks Selecting a Scan Area Office Mode Selecting a Scan Size Professional Mode Scanned Image Edges are Cropped If the edges of a scanned image are cropped make sure your original is placed correctly for scanning If necessary move your original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Solving Faxing Problems Check these solutions if you have problems faxing with your product Cannot Send or Receive Faxes Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product Fax Memory Full Error Appears Sent Fax Quality is Poor Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size Received Fax Quality is Poor Received Fax is Not Printed 400 Parent topic Solving Problems Cannot Send or Receive Faxes If you cannot send or receive faxes try these solutions If an error code is displayed on the control panel try the solutions suggested in the error code list If you are faxing from a computer use the Epson FAX Utility to send your fax Make sure the recipient s fax machine is turned on and working Make sure paper is loaded correctly in your product Make sure you have set up your header information and have not blocked your caller ID Otherwise your faxes might be rejected by the recipient s fax machine If user restriction has been enabled you may need to enter a user name and password Contact your administrator for assista
268. label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ T XXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company Applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes USOC for the equipment RJ11C A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXxX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
269. lable memory Clear fonts and macros from the product s memory using the Clear Font and Macro option from the Setup menu reduce the size of the print job or print one copy at a time Print quality was decreased due to a lack of available memory If the quality of the printout is unacceptable try simplifying the page by reducing the number of graphics or the number and size of the fonts Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available memory Clear fonts and macros from the product s memory using the Clear Font and Macro option from the Setup menu or reduce the data size of the print job 106 Cannot print from the computer due to access control settings Contact your printer administrator 107 User authentication failed and the job has been canceled Contact your printer administrator 201 The product s memory is full You can send pages individually or print received faxes and delete them to free up memory space ee The line was disconnected by the recipient s fax machine Wait a moment then try again The product cannot detect a dial tone Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works If you connected the product to a PBX Private Branch Exchange phone line or Terminal Adapter change the Line Type setting to PBX If you still cannot send a fax turn off the Dial Tone Detection setting Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number
270. laris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
271. lation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless such message Clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges In order to program this information into your fax machine click the link below for instructions on entering fax header information According to the FCC s electrical safety advisory we recommend that you may install an AC surge arrester in the AC outlet to which this equipment is connected Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources and that this is a major nationwide problem This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15
272. lease contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 464 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation writt
273. ll out and reinsert the paper cassette in the optional paper cassette unit to confirm the cassette unit is displayed on the Paper Setup screen 15 Enable the optional paper cassette units in the printer software Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes OS X Parent topic Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes Windows Synchronizing Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software Windows 100 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes OS X Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software OS X Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes Windows You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software Note If you are using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript PS3 printer software see the sections covering that software in this manual to enable the optional cassette units 1 Doone of the following Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Right click your product name and select Printer properties e Windows 7 Click and select Devices and Printers Right click your printer name and select Printer properties e Windows Vista Click and select Control Panel Click Printer under Hardware an
274. loped by the user or with the express written consent of Sun Microsystems Inc SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems Inc to assist in its use correction modification or enhancement SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF In no event will Sun Microsystems Inc be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special indirect and consequential damages even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages Sun Microsystems Inc 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View California 94043 Copyright c 2001 2006 Gerrit Pape All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to
275. lot 69 1 Open the feeder guard and pull up the paper support 2 Slide the edge guides outward 70 3 Ifyou are inserting a stack of paper fan the sheets and tap the stack on a flat surface to even the edges Note You can load one sheet of binder paper with holes on one of the long edges as shown Do not select automatic 2 sided printing for this type of paper ED ooooooo0o00000 ooooo0o0000000 oooo0o00000000 4 Doone of the following e Insert paper glossy or printable side up and short edge first in the center of the slot Caution To prevent paper feeding problems make sure you do not load paper above the arrow marks inside the edge guides 71 Load envelopes short edge first with the flap facing down and the flap edge to the left in the center of the slot 5 Slide the edge guides against the paper but not too tightly 6 Extend the output tray 7 Select the size and type of paper you loaded in the Paper Setup menu 72 Always follow these paper loading guidelines Load only the recommended number of sheets Load paper short edge first no matter which way your document faces Load the printable side faceup Load letterhead or pre printed paper top edge first Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides If you have trouble loading a stack of envelopes press each envelope flat before loading it or load
276. low any instructions displayed on the screen during printing Double sided Printing Options Windows Print Density Adjustments Windows Parent topic Printing with Windows Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows 118 Double sided Printing Options Windows You can select any of the available options on the 2 Sided Printing Settings window to set up your double sided print job Binding Edge Options Select a setting that orients double sided print binding in the desired direction Binding Margin Options Select options that define a wider margin to allow for binding Start Page Selects whether printing starts on the front or back page Create Folded Booklet Options Select the Booklet checkbox and a binding option to print double sided pages as a booklet Parent topic Selecting Double sided Printing Settings Windows Print Density Adjustments Windows You can select any of the available options on the Print Density Adjustment window to adjust the print quality of your double sided print job Print Density Sets the level of ink coverage for double sided printing Increase Ink Drying Time Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing the other side in double sided printing to prevent ink smearing Parent topic Selecting Double sided Printing Settings Windows 119 Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows You can select a variet
277. ly slow or the print head stops during printing and other settings do not help Skip Blank Page Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images Change Standard Resolution Reduces the resolution of print data to correct printing problems Refine screening pattern Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern Allow Applications to Perform ICM Color Matching Allows applications to perform ICM color matching Always Use the Driver s Paper Source Setting Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver rather than the setting in your application Output 1 page documents facedown in 2 Sided mode Outputs single sided pages in a 2 sided print job facedown instead of faceup Parent topic Selecting Extended Settings Windows Printing Your Document or Photo Windows Once you have selected your print settings you are ready to save your settings and print 1 Click OK to save your settings 128 You see your application s Print window such as this one Apron Page 1 65535 Enter ether a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 2 Click OK or Print to start printing Parent topic Printing with Windows Locking Printer Settings Windows Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes The following settings can be locked e Anti copy pattern e Watermark e Header footer e Color printing e 2 sided printing e Multi page pr
278. mentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS INNO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Part 2 Networks Associates Technology Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2001 2003 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 461 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of condi
279. mpt for scanning additional pages after the first page is scanned Parent topic Selecting Scan File Settings Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture With OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 you can scan with your product using an image editing application such as Image Capture Note With OS X in addition to scanning with Image Capture you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for enhancing scanned images and provides an interface for TWAIN compliant OCR scanning software To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads Open an image editing application such as Image Capture 2 Select your Epson product from the DEVICES or SHARED list if necessary You may need to hover over the DEVICES or SHARED list click Show and select your product 3 If you see the Show Details button click it If you are scanning an item on the scanner glass your product begins a preview scan 235 4 Select the Scan Mode setting indicating where you placed your original if available Select any other available scan settings as necessary Scan Mode Document Feeder Kind EJ Color Resolution 300 vi dpi Size US Letter Orientation h 3 D _ Duplex E Pictures Scan PDF _ Combine into single document Image Correction None s Unsharp Mask
280. mstances may not be as broad as some people assume Contact your legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law Parent topic Copyright Notice Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse This is to ensure that the product meets Energy Star standards of energy efficiency More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to sleep to a shorter interval Parent topic Copyright Notice Copyright Attribution 2014 Epson America Inc 12 14 CPD 40373 Parent topic Copyright Notice 493
281. n s sessssssesssseresserrsserrrnerrrnrernnntrnnnrsrnnreserrnseet 55 Changing a Wi Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection 0 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeteeneeees 55 Connecting to a New Wi Fi Router x cr cessacceatiscdoedes capendtaectieeectadeensQeaten ceaiia leadedeagedvinecalxecendiasess 55 Configuring Email Server SSRN a ws cg scecct des cet venctedendesdentuceodee erage tesundeart sol eaceonmaned te ee acini eee 56 Disabling Wi Fi Features c scspictivel tus deapeeetintotes cbdveeictlad anges A KEENER Aaa agente ae deed eee 57 Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript Printing cccsseeeessseeeeseeneeeeeseeeeeeeeees 59 Selecting PDL Page Description Language Settings 0 ceeeeecceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeenaas 59 PDL Print Configuration Options iecissieh re sceenctats tered cage letecwerdeocmalasio ala dela i tered telels 60 Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings cececceeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseseeeeeeeeaaeeeenaes 63 Printer Language and Interface Options aci cissderecwesecid sage endivedetedseiu eeeeaatiaeapsded eed eadedeaspaeeeneeeee 64 Printing a PS3 PostScript Status Sheet 00 0 0 cece eee seeeeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeensaeeeeeseeaeeeensaaeeseeneaeeeees 65 L Gain G PAPO AE T O advises cauhtansnaaciouetvanheaneayecsenbectcod en aaaeevanpechsuddvasssuuaiaestanssausnbivnasceuaasvand 66 Loading Paper in the Cassette c j 2 2 crcercienach
282. n Paper Matte Prem Matte Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Double sided Epson Brochure amp Flyer Paper Matte Double sided Cardstock up to 68 Ib 256 g m Card Stock Parent topic Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source Control Panel Selecting Default Paper Settings Administrator You can adjust default paper settings as an administrator that apply to all print jobs sent to the product Note These settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance Selecting the Default Printer Settings Setting the Universal Print Settings Parent topic Loading Paper Selecting the Default Printer Settings You can change default printer settings using the control panel on the product Note These settings can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 82 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this Ink Levels Maibenance Paper Setup Print Status Sheet Melwork Stalus 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary You see a screen like this fey Sistem Adninistration Enson Connect Services i Gongle Cloud Print Services 4 Select Printer Settings 5 Select the Paper Source Settings options you want to use 6 Select on
283. n a computer screen post on the web 96 to 150 dpi e Print convert to editable text OCR 300 dpi e Fax 200 dpi Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings 231 Selecting Scan File Settings You can select the location name and format of your scan file on the File Save Settings window You can also select various optional settings that control how Epson Scan behaves when you scan and save files img20131205_ 23222306 pd Image Format Type POF pdi Details Paper Size Actual Image Size Orientation Portrait Margirc Left Top 0 00mm 0 00 mm Page Number Save File With Al Pages Compression Level Standaed Compression Overweite ary files with the same name F Show this dialog box before next scan F Open image folder after scanning F Show Add Page dialog after scanning The File Save Settings window may appear after you click Scan on the Epson Scan window You may also be able to access the window by clicking the 2 icon on the Epson Scan window 1 Doone of the following to select the folder in which you want to save your scanned image e Click the button for one of the displayed folders 232 Bet ee Ue 7 e Click the Other button click the Browse or Choose button and select a folder If you want to change the default name for your scanned image click Edit and select the options you want Select the file format you want to use in the Image Format Type menu If your file format provides option
284. n administrator If you cannot access these settings contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the f home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this Tink Levels A Mainben ance Paper Setup mis ooo LE Paver Setup PritStaws Sheet Print Status Sheet Heiwork Stalus ly 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary a 4 Select Printer Settings 63 You see a screen like this fy Printer Settings Paper Sounce Sellings ee LEB MF Timeout Setting Printing Language i Auto Eror Solver Memory Device Inferlace Eo 5 Select the Printing Language and other settings you want to use 6 When you are finished press the ff home button to return to the Home screen Printer Language and Interface Options Parent topic Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript Printing Printer Language and Interface Options Select the settings you want to use Printer Settings option Available Description settings USB I F Timeout Setting 0 5 to 300 Specify the length of time before ending USB communication from a computer using the PCL or PostScript driver This setting is necessary to avoid endless USB communication Printing Language Select the language for the USB or network interface PC Connection via USB Select whether to allow USB communication with the Disable product 64 Parent
285. n like this it Wie Fi Seiup AEF Setup Wizard Push Button Setup CAPS FIH Code Setup WES D H 4 Select Push Button Setup WPS Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup l Press the f home button to exit Your product should now be connected to the network 52 Parent topic Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Printing a Network Status Sheet You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have using your product on a network 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this Ink Levels Maiben ance Paper Setup l Print Staus Sheet Melwark Status ly l f L 3 Select Network Status Select Wi Fi Network Status You see a screen like this E Wi Fi Heteork Status Glain IP Aadress Prini Note If you are connected to a wireless network the signal strength is also displayed 53 5 Select Print 6 Press one of the buttons to print the network status sheet Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have Parent topic Wi Fi or Wired Networking Changing or Updating Network Connections See these sections to change or update how your product connects to a network Accessing the Web Config Utility Changing a USB Connection to a Wi Fi Connection Changing a Wi Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection Connecting to
286. n view the faxes on the LCD screen and print if needed Save to Computer To use this option you must use the Epson FAX Utility Select Yes and Print to have faxes saved to your computer and printed automatically Save to Memory Saves incoming faxes to a connected memory device Device or USB storage device Select Yes and Print to have faxes saved to the memory device and printed automatically Forwards incoming faxes to as many as 5 numbers in your contact list Select Yes and Print to have faxes forwarded and printed automatically Color faxes cannot be forwarded Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit on the paper size in the selected paper source Select to print large incoming faxes at their original lt lt on multiple sheets if necessary On Jf you have loaded A5 size paper select On to rotate landscape oriented incoming faxes so that they print O correctly on the paper On Select On to print incoming faxes so that the pages are stacked in the correct page order When the product is low on memory this option may not be available Off Select On to set a time period to stop automatic Ce printing of faxes or reports and save received faxes in the product s memory Make sure there is enough Time to Stop free memory before using this function Restart Time 264 Setting Options Description i O Forwarding Report Selects whether or when to print a report after an incoming fax is forwar
287. nce If you did not connect a telephone to your product set the Receive Mode setting to Auto so you can receive faxes automatically Check that the cable connecting your telephone wall jack to your product s LINE port is secure Print a fax connection report using your product control panel or fax software to help diagnose the problem Verify that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it If there is no dial tone and you connected the product to a PBX Private Branch Exchange phone line or Terminal Adapter change the Line Type setting to PBX If you still cannot send a fax turn off the turn off the product s dial tone detection setting Turning off the dial tone setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number If you connected your product to a DSL phone line you must connect a DSL filter to the phone jack to enable faxing over the line Contact your DSL provider for the necessary filter If your telephone line has static turn off your product s error correction mode fax communication setting and try faxing again Try lowering your product s fax speed setting Make sure the error correction mode ECM setting is turned on if you are trying to send or receive a color fax If your telephone line uses call waiting and you have trouble receiving faxes turn off call waiting to prevent disruption of incoming faxes 401 If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service t
288. nding area Always store ink cartridges with the label facing up do not store cartridges upside down Parent topic Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Related concepts Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges When a color ink cartridge is expended you can temporarily continue printing from your computer using black ink Replace the expended color cartridge as soon as possible for future printing Note You cannot print with expended color ink cartridges using your product s control panel Printing with Expended Color Cartridges Windows Printing with Expended Color Cartridges OS X Parent topic Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Printing with Expended Color Cartridges Windows If you see a message during printing telling you that you can temporarily print in black ink with an expended color cartridge you can cancel your print job and select settings to print on plain paper or on an envelope Note To use this feature Epson Status Monitor must be enabled 1 Click Cancel or Cancel Print to cancel your print job Note If the message screen appears on another computer on a network you may need to cancel the print job using the product control panel Load plain paper or an envelope in your product Access the print settings in your print application Click the Main tab Select Plain Paper Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type se
289. nditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD 462 Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara California 95054 U S A All rights reserved Use is subject to license terms below This distribution may include materials developed by third parties Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo and So
290. ng High Speed Printing Warning Notifications Establish bidirectional communication zis 9 9 g gig Lower Cassette Cancel OK 6 Select On as the Permit temporary black printing setting 7 Click OK 8 Close the utility window 9 Load plain paper or an envelope in your product 10 Access the print settings in your print application 11 Select Print Settings from the pop up menu 12 Select Plain Paper Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type setting 13 Select the Grayscale option 14 Click Print to print your document Parent topic Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges 325 Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows The following window appears when black ink runs low and there is more color ink 7 EPSON Status Monitor 3 Black ink is low You can extend black ink cartridge life by printing with a mixture of other colors to create composite black Do you want to do this for the current print job No Disable this feature Note The window appears only when you have selected Plain Paper Bright White Paper as the paper type setting and depends on other selected print settings To use this feature Epson Status Monitor must be enabled Click Yes to use a mixture of color inks to create black or No to continue using the remaining black ink for the document you are printing e Click Disable this feature to continue using the remaining black ink Note I
291. ng and pull out the paper cassette 2 Slide the front edge guide outward all the way then slide the side edge guides to the paper size you are using 67 3 Load paper with the printable side facedown and slide the front edge guide against the paper Note Make sure the paper fits beneath the arrow mark inside the edge guides 4 Make sure the paper size label matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette If necessary remove the label holder and change the paper size indicated on the label 5 Insert the paper cassette all the way into the product 68 6 Extend the output tray REIS g M 7 Select the size and type of paper you loaded on the product LCD screen Always follow these paper loading guidelines Load only the recommended number of sheets Load paper short edge first no matter which way your document faces Load the printable side facedown Load letterhead or pre printed paper top edge first Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions Parent topic Loading Paper Related references Paper Loading Capacity Related tasks Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot You can print envelopes or documents in a variety of paper types and sizes in the rear paper feed s
292. ngs Ink Save Mode On Off Saves ink by reducing print density Print Order Last Page on Starts printing from the first page of a file Top First Page on Starts printing from the last page of a file Top Number of Copies 1 to 999 Selects the number of copies to print Binding Margin Left o Specifies the binding edge for double sided documents TopEdge Edge Auto Paper Ejection On Off Ejects paper automatically when printing is stopped during a print job 2 Sided Printing On Off Selects duplex printing PCL Menu Uses a font preinstalled on the printer Uses a font you have downloaded 1to111 Selects the default font number for the default font source 0 44 to 99 99 cpi Selects the default font pitch if the font is scalable and fixed pitch availability depends on font source and number settings 4 00 to 999 75 pt Selects the default font height if the font is scalable and proportional availability depends on font source and number settings Symbol Set Various Selects the default symbol set If the selected font is not available for the selected symbol set the font source and number are replaced with IBM US the default setting 61 PDL Print Configuration Available Description option settings 5 to 128 lines Sets the number of lines for the selected paper size and orientation Changes the line spacing VMI stored in the printer Later changes in page size or orientation cause changes in the Form value based
293. ngs select Settings and select the necessary settings When you are finished press the 5 back button Select Proceed When you are ready to print press one of the buttons Note To cancel printing press the Stop button Parent topic Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen Related references Print Setting Options Device Mode Photo Adjustment Options Device Mode Select the image adjustment options you want to use when viewing and printing photos displayed on the LCD screen 308 Photo Available options Description adjustment settings Automatically adjusts the brightness contrast and saturation of the photo based on the Advanced gt Scene Detection setting that is selected lof sd Turns off automatic adjustments see Note below Uses your camera s PRINT Image Matching or Exif Print adjustments Fix Red Eye Automatically fixes the red eye effect in photos Note Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include faces For this to work both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject s face If your photo includes a face with an intentional color cast such as a statue you may want to turn off Fix Photo to retain the special color effects Parent topic Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen Print Setting Options Device Mode Select the print settings you want to use when printing from a USB flash drive Note Not all options or settings may be available
294. nly in the international characters specific to each language Note Since most software handles fonts and symbols automatically you may never need to adjust your product settings However if you write your own product control programs or if you use older software that cannot control fonts refer to these tables for details on the symbol sets When you consider which font to use also consider which symbol set to combine with the font Available symbol sets vary depending on the mode and font you choose 427 PCL5 Mode Symbol Sets Symbol set Font classification one r E a a ISO 60 Danish Nor wegian Roman g Extension ISO 15 Italian ISO 8859 1 ON Y v v v Latin 1 ISO 11 0S Y v lv Swedish ISO 6 OU vA Y vA VA VA ASCII ISO 4 United Kingdom m 69 m ISO 29 a Legal a a za ISO 8859 2 2N Latin 2 ISO 8859 4 4N Latin 4 ISO 17 Spanish Roman9 y ae 428 Font classification Fontclassification OO OS S O a fje js ja lIs fe 7 ja jo fo fat 12 j3 E ra ma ASRR psan 8859 9 m Latin 5 Windows 3 1 Latin 5 Microsoft 6J Y v v Publishing ee A el ee al ee sre 10 al 6 a ee fas a eeke EEEE EEEE mm ou y bv fv EE EEH omens 3 1 Latin 2 ay e ISO 8859 15 Latin 9 PC Turkish oT Windows 3 0 Latin 1 pe fa PC 8 Code 10U Page 437 429 ee fo pace PEA A ia Multilingual Ventura aes PeEurs58 u v e ebr reb brb be mash eek
295. nt Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Copyright 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that 1 the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation and ii the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Parent topic Copyright Notice 492 A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any Epson product While some countries laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in certain circumstances those circu
296. nt topic Changing or Updating Network Connections Related tasks Scanning to Email Forwarding Received Faxes Disabling Wi Fi Features You may need to disable your product s Wi Fi features if you change your network connection type or need to solve a problem with your network connection Note Before disabling Wi Fi features make a note of your product s SSID network name and password and any network settings selected for the Epson Connect services you may use 1 Press the home button if necessary 57 2 Press F 3 Select Wi Fi Setup You see this screen Wi Fi Seip WF Setup Wira Push Button Setup GAPS PIH Code Setup WPS 4 Scroll down and select Disable Wi Fi 5 Select Yes to disable Wi Fi Parent topic Changing or Updating Network Connections 58 Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript Printing Before enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript printing on your product make sure you have installed the software as described on the Start Here sheet To download the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript drivers go to epson com support wf8590 Selecting PDL Page Description Language Settings Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings Printing a PS3 PostScript Status Sheet Selecting PDL Page Description Language Settings You can select settings for PCL and PostScript printing using the control panel on the product Note These settings can
297. nter Software OS X o eececceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeteeneeees 179 Installing the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeenaas 180 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software OS X 180 Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X cccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeteeees 181 Selecting Page Setup Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X cccccccssssseteeeeeeeeeseenees 187 Selecting Print Layout Options PostScript Printer Software OS X cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 188 Sizing Printed Images PostScript Printer Software OS X oui eeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneneees 189 Managing Color PostScript Printer Software OS X o ecceceeesccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeenes 189 Printing Your Document or Photo PostScript Printer Software OS X c ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 190 Checking Print Status PostScript Printer Software OS X oo eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 190 Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button 2c ccie sccecsshoaren th ieciesscnneeaslines et adnrnaclileededaeieieccilaeseees 191 Seela DENG its sucha eases Sey vee se este a a te en a cg ener eee alae 192 Starting a Scams nenen aen a eaten canteen ued Ne e Taree cate A dete Sie ERIR 192 Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeeese
298. ntial Job Displays jobs that require a password to print Parent topic Control Panel Buttons and Lights Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel You can set an administrator password to lock the following settings and prevent them from being changed e System Administration Setup settings Eco mode settings e Presets e Contacts Note For more information on administration settings see the Administrator s Guide Press the fff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this Ink Levels Hairtbenanpe Hn a S Lrnestatysset Paper Setup Print Status Sheet Melwork Stolus i 3 Scroll down and select Admin Settings Select Admin Password 5 Select Register 20 You see a screen like this Use the displayed keyboard to enter a password and press Enter your password again to confirm Select OK Select Lock Setting and select On o NoD When the control panel is locked you must enter the password to access any of the locked settings Note If you forget your password contact Epson for assistance Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Using Presets Parent topic Using the Control Panel Related tasks Setting User Feature Restrictions Access Control 21 Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Follow these guidelines to enter characters for passwords and other settings To move the cursor select a or Le To change the case of lett
299. o prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each co
300. o refill it Warning If ink gets on your skin wash it thoroughly with soap and water If ink gets into your eyes flush them immediately with water If ink gets into your mouth spit it out and see a doctor right away Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children 6 Remove the cartridge from the package 321 Caution Do not touch the green chip on the cartridge Install the new cartridge immediately after removing the old one if you do not the print head may dry out and be unable to print 7 Gently shake the ink cartridge horizontally for about five seconds as shown Caution Do not remove any labels or seals or ink will leak 8 Insert the new cartridge into the holder and push it in until it clicks into place 9 If the Check option is displayed on the LCD screen select it to make sure the cartridges are installed correctly Caution If you see a message that an ink cartridge is installed incorrectly press in the ink cartridge until it clicks into place 10 When you are finished close the front cover The product starts priming the ink and returns to its previous state when finished Note Do not turn off the printer during ink replacement 322 Caution If you remove an ink cartridge for later use protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in the same environment as the printer The valve in the ink supply port is designed to contain any excess ink but do not touch the ink supply port or surrou
301. of the overall scanned image 226 Saturation Adjusts the density of colors in the overall image Color Balance Adjusts the balance of colors in the overall image Color Palette Provides a graphical interface for adjusting mid tone levels such as skin tones without affecting the highlight and shadow areas of the image For advanced users only Click the Color Palette icon to access the settings Threshold Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated improving text recognition in OCR Optical Character Recognition programs Parent topic Scanning in Professional Mode Selecting a Scan Size Professional Mode You can reduce or enlarge the size of your image as you scan You can also select a specific scan size such as acommon photo size like 4 x 6 inches 102 x 152 mm This places a scan area of that size on the preview image so you can use it to help crop the image in the correct proportions 1 Click the Preview button to preview your image 2 Inthe Epson Scan window select the size you want your scanned image to be from the Target Size list Target Size Sx7n i al Note If you need to rotate the orientation of the target size for your image click the A orientation icon 227 A marquee dotted line appears on your preview image proportioned for the size you selected Welcome to EPSON 7 amp 2 25 in P1143 in 2476 x 3429 pixels 2429 MB Do the foll
302. ograms or All Programs gt EPSON Software 2 Select FAX Utility You see this window a eagBeenc eens LLE per aa e Th L er Fax Setings 267 3 Select Fax Settings for Printer Select your product if prompted You see this window 4 Select Fax Settings 5 Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your fax settings Note For detailed information select the FAX Utility Help option Parent topic Setting Up Fax Features Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility OS X You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for OS X 1 Doone of the following e OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility 268 e OS X 10 5 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax select your product and select Open Print Queue Select Utility 2 Double click FAX Utility if necessary You see this window e 0 FAX Utility _ Printer FAX EPSON Tool p he D KJ ans sso Syrchrom ze Fax Receve Mo d Contacts Fax Settings 7 gaV 3 X E Check Fax Fax Setvings Speed Dwi Crows gt Connection Duwit 3 Select your FAX product in the Printer list 4 Select Fax Settings 5
303. olving Faxing Problems Related references Output Settings Fax Fax Sending Options Related tasks Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen Sent Fax Quality is Poor If the sent fax quality is poor try these solutions Clean the scanner glass 403 e Clean the ADF e Try changing the resolution setting on the control panel e Try adjusting the density setting on the control panel e If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single recipient try sending the fax using the Direct Send feature Note If you send a high resolution monochrome fax without using the Direct Send feature the product may automatically lower the resolution Try enabling the error correction mode ECM setting Parent topic Solving Faxing Problems Related references Basic Settings Fax Fax Sending Options Related tasks Cleaning Your Product Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size If your recipient receives a fax in an incorrect size try these solutions e If you are trying to fax an A3 size document make sure the recipient s fax machine supports the paper size If the message OK Reduced Size appears in the fax transmission report the recipient s fax machine does not support A3 size documents e If you are sending a fax using the scanner glass make sure your original is placed correctly on the scanner glass and that the correct paper size is selected on the control panel e Clean the scanner glass and document cover Parent topic Solving F
304. on Scan Icon Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Solving Copying Problems Check these solutions if you have problems copying with your product Product Makes Noise But Nothing Copies Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder Parent topic Solving Problems Product Makes Noise But Nothing Copies If your product makes a noise but nothing copies try these solutions e Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged Then clean the print head if necessary e Ifthe nozzle check page does not print but the product s power is on make sure your product software is installed correctly e Make sure your product is level not tilted Parent topic Solving Copying Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While Your product is performing routine maintenance This is normal Parent topic Solving Copying Problems Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder If your originals do not feed when placed in the ADF try these solutions Make sure the ADF icon appears on the LCD screen If not reload the originals e Make sure the size weight and number of your originals are supported by the ADF Make sure the originals are loaded correctly 364 e Try cleaning the inside of the ADF Parent topic Solving Copying Problems Related references Document Jams in
305. on icons to choose where to save your scanned file wep Folder WebDAV e Evernote Windows only e lel Google Drive e lal sugarsync e E Microsoft SharePoint server Windows only Note You may need to click the arrow next to the icons in order to see all of them The available icons may vary depending on the software version you are using Select your Destination settings Note The settings may vary depending on the software version you are using See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details Select any other scan settings as necessary and click Send Your originals are scanned and uploaded to the indicated server Note You can also create a scan job for uploading scanned images to a SharePoint server or a cloud service You can use the scan job when you scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture or when you scan using the Document Capture Pro option on the product control panel Parent topic Scanning Special Projects 239 Scanning Multi Page Originals as Separate Files You can use Document Capture Pro Windows only to scan multi page originals as separate scanned files You indicate where you want the new scanned files to start by inserting a blank page or barcode between the pages of your original Note The settings may vary depending on the software version you are using See the Help information in Document Capture Pro for details 1 Load a multi page original wi
306. one envelope ata time If print quality declines when printing multiple envelopes try loading one envelope at a time Do not load envelopes that are curled folded or too thin Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions Parent topic Loading Paper Related references Paper Loading Capacity Related tasks Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot You can load one sheet of paper in the front paper feed slot Note You cannot load paper while printing from the front paper feed slot Paper that is too stiff may not load correctly even if it is within the product s paper thickness specifications 73 1 Extend the output tray 3 Insert the paper with the printable side facedown until the product pulls it in partially Note Keep the paper straight to prevent it from loading at an angle 74 Always follow these paper loading guidelines Load only one sheet at a time e Load paper short edge first no matter which way your document faces Load the printable side facedown e Load letterhead or pre printed paper top edge first e Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions Parent topic Loading Paper Related references Paper Specifications Paper Loading Capacity Related tasks Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot Paper Loading Capacity
307. one is connected to your product s EXT port e Make sure the Receive Mode is set to Manual 402 Note When answering a call that is a fax wait until the product s LCD screen displays a message that a connection has been made before you hang up Parent topic Solving Faxing Problems Related tasks Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Using the Fax Setup Wizard Fax Memory Full Error Appears If you see an error message telling you that the product s fax memory is full try these solutions If you set the product to save received faxes in the product s memory or inbox delete any faxes you have already read If you set the product to save received faxes on a computer turn on the selected computer Once the faxes are saved on the computer they are deleted from the product s memory If you set the product to save received faxes on a memory device connect the selected memory device containing the save fax folder to the product Once the faxes are saved on the memory device they are deleted from the product s memory Note Make sure the memory device has enough available memory and is not write protected If the memory is full try sending a monochrome fax using the Direct Send feature or sending your faxes in smaller batches If the product cannot print a received fax due to a product error such as a paper jam the memory full error may appear Clear any product errors then ask the sender to resend the fax Parent topic S
308. ong period unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Place the product on a flat stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions It will not operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle 436 Allow space behind the product for the cables and space above the product so that you can fully raise the document cover Leave enough space in front of the product for the paper to be fully ejected Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity shocks or vibrations or dust Do not place or store the product outdoors Do not place the product near excessive heat sources or in direct sunlight Leave enough room around the product for sufficient ventilation Do not block or cover openings in the case or insert objects through the slots Keep the product away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference such as loudspeakers or the base units of cordless telephones When connecting the product to a computer or other device with a cable ensure the correct orientation of the connectors Each connector has only one correct orientation Inserting a connector in the wrong orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable Do not touch the flat white cable inside the product Do not move the print head by hand this may damage the product Do not spill liquid on the product or use the product with wet hands Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the
309. ons in your router or access point documentation to add the address to the list If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name SSID follow the instructions that came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually Make sure you are connected to a 2 4 GHz band and not 5 GHz If your router or access point has security enabled determine the kind of security it is using and any required password or passphrase for connection Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA passphrase correctly Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels If so verify that your wireless access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel if necessary If you are using a Wi Fi Direct connection that suddenly disconnects the Wi Fi direct password on your device may have been changed If necessary delete the existing DIRECT xxxxxxxx connection settings from your device and enter a new password See your device documentation for instructions If you connected your product to a Windows computer using Wi Fi Direct and it automatically selected Access Point Mode you may have trouble accessing a low priority Internet connection Check the network connection or adapter settings in the Windows Control Panel and set the Internet metric setting to 100 for your version of the Internet Protocol 359 Parent topic Solving Network Problems Related concepts Wi Fi Direct Mode S
310. opics Loading Paper Solving PostScript Printing Problems Check these solutions if you have problems using the PostScript printing software Nothing Prints Using the Postscript Printing Software Documents Print Incorrectly Using the Postscript Printing Software Accessing Printer Properties Postscript Windows Parent topic Solving Problems Nothing Prints Using the Postscript Printing Software If your document doesn t print try these solutions e Make sure your product is turned on and properly connected e Make sure the printing language setting on the control panel is correct If Text Detection is enabled on the control panel and you cannot print text set the printing language to PS3 e Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program In Windows the product may not print if a large number of print jobs are sent Try selecting Print directly to the printer on the Advanced tab in the printer properties Parent topic Solving PostScript Printing Problems 381 Related topics Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript Printing Documents Print Incorrectly Using the Postscript Printing Software lf your document does not print correctly try these solutions e Ifthe file you are printing was created in an application that allows you to change the data format such as Adobe Photoshop make sure the settings in the application match the printer driver settings e EPS files created in
311. opies Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright c 1993 The Regents of the University of California Copyright c 1994 1995 Sun Microsystems Inc Copyright c 1998 1999 NeoSoft Inc All Rights Reserved This software may be used modified copied distributed and sold in both source and binary form provided that these copyrights are retained and their terms are followed Under no circumstances are the authors or NeoSoft Inc responsible for the proper functioning of this software nor do the authors assume any liability for damages incurred with its use Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to NeoSoft Inc NeoSoft Inc may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty Requests for permission may be sent to NeoSoft Inc 1770 St James Place Suite 500 Houston TX 77056 Portions Copyright 1998 2003 Kurt D Zeilenga Portions Copyright 1998 2001 Net Boolean Incorporated All rights reserved Portions Copyright 2008 Pierangelo Masarati SysNet All rights reserved Copyright C 1995 1996 1997 1998 and 1999 WIDE Project All rights reserved Redistribution and
312. or them in your application before printing 138 Select the page setup options Paper Size and Orientation Note If you do not see these settings in the print window check for them in your application before printing They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu Select any application specific settings that appear on the screen such as those shown in the image above for the Preview application Select Print Settings from the pop up menu Y Preview Layout Color Matching Paper Handling Cover Page Print Settings Color Options Two sided Printing Settings Supply Levels 139 You see these settings Print Settings Paper Source Auto Select Media Type Plain Paper Bright White Paper Print Quality Normal Grayscale V Mirror image Cancel 9 Select the Paper Source you wish to print from 10 Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media Type setting Note The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper Check the paper type settings list for details 11 Select the Print Quality setting you want to use 12 Select any of the available print options Paper Source Options OS X Print Quality Options OS X Print Options OS X Parent topic Printing with OS X Related references Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Related tasks Selecting Page Setup Settings OS X 140 Printing Your Document or Photo OS X Paper Sourc
313. ossible and wait at least 6 hours Then try cleaning the print head again If quality still does not improve one of the ink cartridges may be old or damaged and needs to be replaced Parent topic Print Head Nozzle Check Related concepts Print Head Cleaning Related topics Loading Paper 331 Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility You can check the print head nozzles using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer 1 2 Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product Do one of the following Windows Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar e OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility e OS X 10 5 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax select your product and select Open Print Queue Select Utility Select Nozzle Check You see a window like this To perform a nozzle check make sure that the printer is on and connected to the computer Also make sure that A4 or Letter size plain paper is loaded in the rear paper feed or the paper cassette Click Print to print a nozzle check pattern or dick Cancel to quit 332 4 Click Print 5 Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines Print head
314. ot save sent color faxes to its memory If the Save Failure Data option is enabled faxes that failed to be sent are stored to the product s memory and you can resend them from the Status Menu screen Parent topic Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related tasks Using Presets Selecting the Line Type Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Fax Sending Options While sending a fax you can select Menu and select these options from the Fax Send Settings menu Note You can also select these options in the User Default Settings menu 285 Setting Options Description S Resolution Standard Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of outgoing faxes Density Automatically adjusts the darkness of outgoing faxes Select this option when sending black and white text documents Manual Lets you select from various density levels Document Size Glass Half Letter Sets the size for a document placed on the scanner Letter Legal 11x17in ADF 2 Sided Off Select On to enable 2 sided faxing from the ADF The Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled when fon you turn on this setting Direct Send Off Select On to send black and white faxes to a single recipient as soon as the connection is made without saving the scanned image to memory You cannot use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a fax to multiple r
315. our product turn it back on and try restarting Epson Scan again e Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan Settings Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan Settings Make sure the Connection setting is set to Network then click the Test button Windows other versions Click or Start gt All Programs or Programs gt EPSON gt EPSON Scan gt EPSON Scan Settings Make sure the Connection setting is set to Network then click the Test button OS X Open the Applications folder click Epson Software and click EPSON Scan Settings Make sure the Connection setting is set to Network then click the Test button e Make sure the option selected as the Timeout Setting in the Epson Scan Settings program is long enough to complete scanning over a network e You may need to disable the firewall and any anti virus software on your wireless router or access point Note With OS X in addition to scanning with Image Capture you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for enhancing scanned images and provides an interface for TWAIN compliant OCR scanning software To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads Parent topic Solving Network Problems Related tasks Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel 363 Starting a Scan Using the Eps
316. outer access point switch or hub e Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router access point switch or hub e Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable Try printing to your product from another computer on the network If you are connecting the product via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi Fi icon does not appear lit on the LCD make sure your product software was installed correctly If necessary reinstall your software Parent topic Solving Network Problems Related concepts When to Uninstall Your Product Software Related tasks Printing a Network Status Sheet Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking 362 Cannot Scan Over a Network If you cannot start Epson Scan for scanning over a network try these solutions If you cannot scan from your product control panel make sure you restarted your computer after installing the product software Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or security software Note If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router set the router to operate in dual band 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz mode See your router documentation for instructions e If you are scanning a large original at a high resolution a network communication error may occur Try scanning again at a lower resolution e If network communication was interrupted while starting Epson Scan exit Epson Scan wait a few seconds and restart it If Epson Scan cannot restart turn off y
317. overlay patterns For Color Text Graphs and Images Prints colored text graphics and images with overlay patterns Enhancement Options Specifies Color Universal Print enhancement settings for text graphics and images Additional Settings Options Rotate 180 Prints the image rotated 180 from its original orientation 123 High Speed Speeds up printing but may reduce print quality Mirror Image Flips the printed image left to right Parent topic Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Header Footer Settings Windows You can select any of the Header Footer Settings options to add headers or footers when you print The items are available to print at the top or bottom of your pages in either the left right or center of the page Note These settings are not saved with your document Top Right v None v Date Time Bottom Center Bottom Right v None Yy None Reset Defaults OK Carel You can select to print the following information e User Name e Computer Name e Date e Date Time e Collate Number copy number Note The user name computer name date and time come from the Windows Control Panel on your computer Parent topic Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows 124 Selecting a Printing Preset Windows For quick access to common groups of print settings you can select a printing preset on the Main or More Options tab Note You can create your own pres
318. ower Cassette Unit None 3 Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting 4 Click OK 173 The optional paper cassettes are now enabled Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes Windows Synchronizing Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings PostScript Printer Software Windows Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print 1 Open a photo or document for printing 2 Select the print command in your application Note You may need to select a print icon on your screen the Print option in the File menu or another command See your application s help utility for details 3 If necessary select your product name as the printer you want to use and then click the Preferences button 174 ee N Oot e You see the Layout tab of your printer settings window Layout Paper Quality Onentation COE Print on Both Sides B None v Page Order Front to Back Page Format Pages per Sheet 1 v Booklet Select the orientation of your document To print on both sides of the paper select one of the Print on Both Sides settings To change the printing order of the pages select one of the Page Order settings To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper adjust the Pages per Sheet setting To create a folded bookle
319. owing Windows Open the My Computer Computer or Windows Explorer utility Then right click the name of your flash drive listed as a removable disk and select Eject e OS X Drag the removable disk icon for your flash drive from the desktop into the trash Caution Do not remove a flash drive before completing the procedure above or you may lose data from the flash drive 2 Pull the flash drive out of the USB port on the front of the product Parent topic Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen See these sections to view and print photos or other files displayed on your product s LCD screen Printing JPEG Photos Printing TIFF and PDF Files Photo Adjustment Options Device Mode Print Setting Options Device Mode Parent topic Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product Printing JPEG Photos You can select JPEG photos for printing as you view them on the LCD screen 1 Press the home button if necessary 2 Select Memory Device 3 Select JPEG 306 You see a screen like this l Select Images So ee 7 Settings Note If you have more than 999 JPEG images on your device the images are divided into groups and you must first select the group you want to display 4 Doone of the following to select your photos e To select individual photos select the thumbnail image of the photo you want to print then use the numeric keypad on the control panel or press or
320. owing as necessary to work with the selected scan area To move the marquee click inside the scan area and drag the marquee where you want it To resize the scan area place your cursor over the edge or corner of the marquee then click and drag the edge where you want it Note Manually adjusting the marquee will not change the target size of the scanned file The marquee only indicates the area of the image that will be scanned 228 4 Tocreate a scanned image size that is not available in the Target Size list click the Customize option You see this window Target Size Target Size Name User Defined Delete 5 Name the custom size enter the size click Save and click OK Then adjust the marquee on the preview image The marquee is automatically proportioned for your custom scan size 229 6 To use additional sizing tools click the Windows or gt OS X icon next to the Target Size setting and select options as desired Target Size 5x7in 7 Al w 5 Ol H 7 00 in B Scale 158 Y bs Trimming Off 2 On e Scale Reduces or enlarges your image by the percentage you enter Trimming Turns automatic image cropping on or off Unlock icon Unlocks the width height proportions of the scanned image size so you can adjust it without constraint Parent topic Scanning in Professional Mode Image Preview Guidelines You can preview your scanned image so you can adjust the scan se
321. p 7 Toadd or delete a contact select the number next to it 8 Select Save Parent topic Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel Setting Up Speed Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility Windows You can set up your speed dial and group dial lists using the FAX Utility for Windows The utility also lets you import fax numbers from the Windows Address Book and back up fax numbers stored in your product s memory Note You can create up to 60 speed dial and group dial entries combined 1 Doone of the following Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen Windows other versions Click or Start gt Programs or All Programs gt EPSON Software 2 Select FAX Utility 277 You see this window 3 Select Fax Settings for Printer Select your product if prompted 278 You see this window Select Speed Dial Group Dial List 279 You see this window Pe fdt yew Hele YAAR Entry Number Name Group Name indes vroeg Fan Number Fax Speed 5 Select an empty entry and click the icon Note To edit an entry select it and click the icon To delete an entry select it and click the icon 6 Do one of the following To create a speed dial entry select Speed Dial enter a name and fax number and click OK To create a group dial entry select Group enter a name select your desired fax numbers and click OK 7 Repeat the previous steps as necessary to add all your speed di
322. pad and press l 7 Select OK Parent topic Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings Related tasks Changing the Eco Mode Settings Changing the Power Off Timer Settings You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 38 You see a screen like this Ink Levels A Hartenange Paper Setup Print Status Sheet etwas Ir 3 Scroll down and select System Administration Enter the administrator password if necessary 4 Select Common Settings 5 Select Power Off Timer 6 Select atime period between 30minutes and 12h 12 hours Parent topic Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and More You can print documents photos emails and web pages from your home office or even across the globe You can use your smartphone tablet or computer Epson offers these solutions to print from anywhere Epson Email Print Epson iPrint Mobile App Epson Remote Print and Epson Scan to Cloud Using Epson Email Print Using the Epson iPrint Mobile App Using Epson Remote Print Using Epson Scan to Cloud Parent topic Product Basics Using Epson Email Print With Epson Email Print you can prin
323. page documents fscerdonn n 2 Sded rode Printer Control Language Lets you select the printer control language Graphics Mode Lets you select the mode by which to output PDL commands to the product TrueType Font Lets you select how you want to print TrueType fonts Offset Settings Lets you make fine tune adjustments to the print position of data on your printout 163 Skip Blank Page Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images Always Spool RAW Datatype Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems Print as Bitmap Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing and other settings do not help Refine screening pattern Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern Always Use the Driver s Paper Source Setting Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver rather than the setting in your application Uses the collate settings specified in the application Prints using the collate setting in your application Page Rendering Mode Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing Collate Using Printer Driver Prints and collates multi page documents using the printer driver Deselect this checkbox to use the product to collate your print jobs instead This setting is automatically enabled if there is not enough memory on the product to collate your print job Output 1 pag
324. panel You do this by accessing the scan jobs in the Document Capture Pro Windows or Document Capture OS X program 1 Start Document Capture Pro or Document Capture on a computer connected to the product 2 Click the Manage Job icon from the toolbar at the top of the window You see a window showing the current scan job list 3 If you want to add a scan job click Add or the icon enter a name for the new job select settings as necessary and click OK You can now use the new scan job when you scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Note See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details 202 4 If you want to assign scan jobs to the selection list on the product control panel do one of the following Windows Click Event Settings OS X Click the icon at the bottom of the window then click Event Settings 5 Select the jobs that you want to assign to any of the pull down menus click OK then click OK again Select the ection to be launched when the bution is pressed O 3 Soan o POF Ato Detect Auto 200dn Save to Documerts 2 Take No Action Take No Action Take No Action 5 Take No Action Take No Action 7 Take No Action 8 Take No Action 9 Take No Action O Tale No Action Take No Action 12 Take No Action J 280 WO can be oriy selected from Network Option You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel Parent topi
325. pear on the reverse side of heavily saturated or dark images If one side of a sheet will contain a lighter image or text print that side first Adjust the Print Density and or Increase Ink Drying Time settings If printed copies are smeared lower the copy density setting on the control panel Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged Then clean the print head if necessary Align the print head Clean the paper path Note Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle Place it on a flat stable surface that extends beyond the base of the product in all directions Parent topic Solving Print Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Cleaning 391 Print Head Alignment Related references Available Epson Papers Paper Specifications Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Double sided Printing Settings Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Selecting Double sided Printing Settings OS X Selecting Printing Preferences OS X Cleaning the Paper Guide Related topics Loading Paper Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps If your printouts are faint or have gaps try these solutions e Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged Then clean the print head if necessary The ink cartridges may be old or low on ink and you may need to replace them e Make
326. per type settings are correct for the paper source Load and eject paper without printing to clean the paper path e If paper does not feed correctly after replacing the maintenance rollers make sure you installed the maintenance rollers correctly e If you installed an optional paper cassette unit be sure to enable the cassette unit in the printing software e If your product pauses during printing make sure the front cover is closed e The maintenance rollers may be at the end of their service life Check the maintenance roller status and replace them if necessary e For best results follow these guidelines e Use new smooth high quality paper that is not curled creased old too thin or too thick Load paper in the cassette printable side down Do not load binder paper with holes in the cassette Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F Paper Loading Capacity Paper Specifications Related tasks Cleaning the Paper Guide Related topics Loading Paper 366 Paper Jam Problem
327. ppear in subtly shaded image areas such as skin tones This option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers The results of descreening do not appear in the preview image only in your scanned image Color Restoration Restores the colors in faded photos automatically Backlight Correction Removes shadows from photos that have too much background light Dust Removal Removes dust marks from your originals automatically Color Enhance Enhances the red green or blue shades in the scanned image Edge Fill Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with the color you select Auto Exposure Automatically adjusts the image exposure settings when you click the aj Auto Exposure icon To automatically adjust image exposure settings continuously click the Configuration button click the Color tab and select Continuous auto exposure You can adjust the level of auto exposure using a slider Histogram Adjustment Provides a graphical interface for adjusting highlight shadow and gamma levels individually For advanced users only Click the histogram icon to access the settings Tone Correction Provides a graphical interface for adjusting tone levels individually For advanced users only Click the tone correction icon to access the settings Brightness Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image Contrast Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas
328. product Restricted features require the user to enter an ID and password on the product control panel After feature restrictions have been set up in Web Config you must enable them using the product control panel Note For more information on administration settings see the Administrator s Guide 1 Press the home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 24 You see a screen like this Ink Levels Al mtes ooo ha CET Maintenance Paper Setup _ Print Status Sheed _Network Status ly Scroll down and select System Administration Scroll down and select Security Settings Select Access Control Select On Select whether to allow Jobs Without Authentication Parent topic Using the Control Panel Related tasks Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Windows NO a Changing LCD Screen Language You can change the language used on the LCD screen Note This setting can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change this setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the home button if necessary 2 Select Setup 25 You see a screen like this Ink Levels Al mtes ooo ha Paver Set Prin Staws Sheet Maintenance Paper Setup _ Print Status Sheet _Network Status ly Scroll down and select System Administration Select Common Settings S
329. py an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License 444 c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License
330. r Yelow ink Levels information SI Maintenance Box Service Life Update OK 3 Do the following as necessary e You can update the ink cartridge and maintenance box status by clicking Update e Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink cartridge as indicated on the screen Note If any of the cartridges installed in the product is broken incompatible with the product model or improperly installed Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate cartridge status Parent topic Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status 318 Related tasks Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges Replacing the Maintenance Box Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box You can purchase genuine Epson ink maintenance boxes and paper at Epson Supplies Central at epson com ink3 U S sales or epson ca Canadian sales You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller To find the nearest one call 800 GO EPSON 800 463 7766 Note This product uses only genuine Epson brand cartridges Other brands of ink cartridges and ink supplies are not compatible and even if described as compatible may not function properly The cartridges included with the printer are designed for printer setup and not for resale After some ink is used for priming the rest is available for printing Yields vary considerably based on images printed print settings paper type frequency of use and temperature For print qual
331. r on the short edge Manual Long edge binding to print your double sided print job by printing one side and prompting you to flip the paper over on the long edge to print the other side recommended for paper types that do not support automatic duplexing 116 Manual Short edge binding to print your double sided print job by printing one side and prompting you to flip the paper over on the short edge to print the other side recommended for paper types that do not support automatic duplexing 2 Click the Settings button You see this window Binding a fa aip Top a lh Om eae edge Binding Margin Front Page 0 00 0 00 1 18 Back Page 0 00 1 18 Cmm inh Start Page From Front O From Back Create Folded Booklet _ Booklet Center Binding Side Binding 1A El 117 7 8 9 Select the double sided printing options you want to use Click OK to return to the Main tab Click the Print Density button You see this window Select Document Type ext Text with Photo Adjustments Print Density Increase Ink Drying Time Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting The software automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type If necessary select the Adjustments options you want to use Click OK to return to the Main tab Print a test copy of your double sided document to test the selected settings 10 Fol
332. r mobile device Download Epson iPrint from the Apple App Store or Google Play Connect your mobile device to the same wireless network that your product is using Print from your mobile device to your Epson product Parent topic Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and More Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Using Epson Remote Print With Epson Remote Print software on your Windows computer or laptop you can print to an Epson Email enabled product anywhere in the world 1 2 3 Set up your product for network printing as described in this manual See the link below Visit epson com connect to learn more about Remote Print and how to download the software Download and install the Remote Print software 40 4 5 Obtain the email address and optional access key of the Epson product you want to use for printing and enter this address during Remote Print setup Select the print command in your application and choose the Remote Print driver for your Epson product Parent topic Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and More Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Using Epson Scan to Cloud The Epson Scan to Cloud service sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect 1 2 4 5 6 Set up your product for network scanning as described in this manual See the link below Visit epson com connect for instructions on registering an acco
333. r of pages you are faxing as the Pages setting Note Leave the Copies setting set to 1 Select Recipient Settings from the pop up menu 295 You see this window Recipient Settings rey Recipient List Name Company Corp Fax Number AL n Add Name Company Corp Fax Number A hyphen is available only at the beginning of the phone number because it acts as a pause in dialing External Access Prefix Cancel Fax Do one of the following to choose your recipient e Select a name or group from the Recipient List e Enter a name company and fax number and click the button Click the l icon and select a recipient from your address book Select Fax Settings from the pop up menu 296 You see this window Fax Settings r g Color Black amp White J Color Image Quality Normal red Cancel Efax 9 Select the Color and Image Quality settings you want to use for your fax 10 Click Fax Parent topic Sending Faxes Receiving Faxes See these sections to receive faxes with your product Fax Reception Receiving Faxes Automatically Receiving Faxes Manually Forwarding Received Faxes Receiving a Fax by Polling Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen Parent topic Faxing Fax Reception Your product will automatically receive and print faxes when you set the Receive Mode to Auto If you connected a telephone to your product so you can use the same phone line for faxes and vo
334. ranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they 449 have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call t
335. re scanning using the Epson Scan Black amp White setting adjust the Threshold setting and scan again Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related references Available Image Adjustments Office Mode Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images If a line of dots appears in all your scanned images clean the scanner glass with a soft dry lint free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the cloth if necessary Paper towels are not recommended Caution Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related tasks Cleaning Your Product 397 Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked If straight lines in an original appear crooked in a scanned image make sure to place your original straight when you scan it Parent topic Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Image is Distorted or Blurry If a scanned image appears distorted or blurry try these solutions e Make sure your original is not wrinkled or warped This may prevent the original from laying flat on the scanner glass e Do not move your original or your product during scanning e Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle Place it on a flat stable surface that extends beyond the base of the product in all directions e Adjust these Epson Scan settings
336. rent topic Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related tasks Selecting the Date and Time Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Sending a Fax on Demand You can store one scanned document up to 100 black and white pages and have it sent automatically when another fax machine requests it Other fax users can receive the document by calling your fax number and using the polling receive function on their fax machines 1 Place your original on the product for faxing 2 Press the ff home button if necessary 288 3 Select Fax Contacts History Oni Haak tr Preset 4 Select Menu 5 Select Polling Send and select On 6 If you need to change any fax settings select Menu select Fax Send Settings and select your settings 7 Press the B amp W button Your document is scanned and stored until you overwrite or delete it You can store only one document at a time Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document You can also delete a stored document from the Status Menu Parent topic Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Sending a Stored Fax You can store one black and white scanned document up to 100 pages and send it whenever necessary 1 Place your original on the product for faxing 2 Press t
337. rersserrnnnren nee 364 Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While ssnnseeesnneeesnnnessnrrneerrnnernnrrrnnntstnnrsserrnssrrnnnrennee 364 Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder uesssssireesrrerisrrrrrrerrrserresrrnna 364 SOWING Paper Probl mS enian peee eee e a E a E E EE a E 365 Paper Feeding PTODIGIS jcc vesetccuctaeccte det sa cantaeeceacedrsias ceatteasd ag cunt smbusteedeinac ot utanssteccontanceseeeesaimets 365 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A ccc cceseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeteeaaeeeeenaeeetenaees 367 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 c cceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 368 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 cccceceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneaas 368 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 ooo eeeecceeeceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeensaeeeeesneeeeeesaaeeeenaaes 371 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 ceeeesseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeensaaeeeeeeaaeeeeenaeeetenaaes 372 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit 0 375 Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeneeea 377 Paper Ejector Problems sispan hinna tats deresesstay onus ances cbban deta pai nE AA ATEA TAERE aea 381 Solving PostScript Printing Problems sssssesssssserseesesrneenrreeenrrssrtrsssrrrnstrnnettnntntnnnnt
338. riateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work 459 stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or addition
339. ridge This could damage the print head Store ink cartridges in a cool dark place After bringing an ink cartridge inside from a cold storage site allow it to warm up at room temperature for at least three hours before using it 438 e Store ink cartridges with their labels facing upward Do not store cartridges upside down Parent topic General Product Safety Instructions LCD Screen Safety Instructions Use only a dry soft cloth to clean the LCD screen Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers e Ifthe LCD screen is damaged contact Epson If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands wash them thoroughly with soap and water If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes flush them immediately with water If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing see a doctor immediately Do not press too hard on the LCD screen e Do not use a pointy or sharp object such as a pen or your fingernail to operate the LCD screen Parent topic General Product Safety Instructions Wireless Connection Safety Instructions Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically controlled devices such as pacemakers automatic doors or fire alarms When using this product near such devices or inside a medical facility follow the directions from authorized staff members at the facility and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident
340. ridges and maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal please go to epson com recycle for more information Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows Replacing the Maintenance Box Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status Your printer and its software will let you know when an ink cartridge is low or expended or when the maintenance box needs to be replaced Note When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript PS3 printer software with the product you can check ink cartridge and maintenance box status by using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software To download the standard Epson printer software go to epson com support wf8590 Checking Cartridge Status on the LCD Screen Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with Windows Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with OS X Parent topic Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes Checking Cartridge Status on the LCD Screen When one of your cartridges is low you see the Ba icon on the LCD screen and the orange i Status light flashes 313 When a cartridge is expended you see the Bee icon and the orange Status light stays on You can use the i Status button check the status of the cartridges and maintenance box 1 Pre
341. rintout is copied e Watermark adds a visible watermark to your printout Note Click the Add Delete button to create your own watermark and click the Settings button to customize the watermark e Header Footer adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout Note Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer 4 Toadd a password to your print job select the Confidential Job checkbox then enter a password Confidential jobs are stored in the product s memory without being printed To print the job enter the password for the confidential job on the product s control panel Note Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product s memory after printing 5 Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print Custom Color Correction Options Windows Image Options and Additional Settings Windows Header Footer Settings Windows Parent topic Printing with Windows Related tasks Printing Your Document or Photo Windows 121 Custom Color Correction Options Windows You can select any of the available options in the Color Correction window to customize the image colors for your print job Color Controls Lets you select a Color Mode setting individual settings for Brightness Contrast Saturation and Density and individual color tones Depending on the selected color mode you can also adjust the midtone density using the Gamma s
342. rk based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it
343. rkness of the scanned image Contrast Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image Threshold Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated improving text recognition in OCR Optical Character Recognition programs Parent topic Scanning in Office Mode Scanning in Professional Mode When you scan in Professional Mode Epson Scan automatically saves your scanned file in PDF format in your operating system s Documents or My Documents folder or opens it in your scanning program You can select settings preview and change the scanned file settings as necessary 1 Start Epson Scan and select Professional Mode as the Mode setting 218 You see this window Destination Image Type Resolution 300 v v d Document Sie w asju Hin vi E Taget Size Original v Al gt hal Mm 2 a Unsharp Mask C Descreeringl C Color Restoration 219 10 11 12 13 Select the Document Type setting that matches your original such as Reflective for documents or photos Select the Document Source setting indicating where you placed your original To scan a 2 sided document in the ADF select ADF Double sided Note If you are using the ADF remove any documents from the scanner glass Select the specific type of original you are scanning as the Auto Exposure Type setting Document or Photo Select the det
344. rrently stored in the product s memory Protocol Trace Print a detailed report for the previous sent or received fax Parent topic Printing Fax Reports 304 Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product Follow the instructions here to work with a USB flash drive inserted into your product Inserting a USB Flash Drive Removing a USB Flash Drive Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive Inserting a USB Flash Drive Insert your USB flash drive into the USB port on the front of the product Note Epson cannot guarantee the compatibility of your device Make sure the files on the device are compatible with the product USB Device Photo File Specifications Parent topic Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product Related tasks Removing a USB Flash Drive USB Device Photo File Specifications You can use USB devices with your product containing files that meet these specifications File format JPEG with the Exif version 2 3 standard TIFF 6 0 compliant uncompressed images RGB full color or binary not CCITT encoded Image size 80 x 80 pixels to 10200 x 10200 pixels File size Up to 2GB Number of files JPEG Up to 9990 TIFF Up to 999 PDF Up to 999 Parent topic Inserting a USB Flash Drive 305 Removing a USB Flash Drive After you finish working with a USB flash drive follow these steps to remove it 1 If your product is connected to your computer using a USB cable do one of the foll
345. rsion or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROG
346. rt of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the
347. ry The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 450 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifica
348. s OS X st easesters i tetencteioeeeedae reall aden Sete eae Maninenet alee Siawentds 143 Selecting Double sided Printing Settings OS X eeccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeecaeeeeeeaaeeeeenaaeeseeeneeeeees 144 Double sided Printing Options and Adjustments OS X cccecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeneneees 145 Managing Color OQS X erer aa a aaee a aaa Ea Ea tated ET a a a ii 146 Color Matching and Color Options OS X ssssssessesssenessserrssrrrrsttrrrrrttnrtnntntsttrnssrrrnserennsrrnn net 147 Selecting Printing Preferences OS X sscc ec sccecseheeeestniennesdeiseedeadtesexteeeiaedeetedeashaeabepeentaneenen 148 Printing Preferences OS Xo is fede coe naj aeches Ss Ged actidiied es aeanas sadea scene ue ades ea daede bapasecen tou saedeaese 149 Printing Your Document or Photo OS Xie ccsewanesntendiciatedsd eines heathen uacaendiel nada 150 Checking Print Status OS Kee de cece cls 5 ce cctenatcuseeceraieanpotacn deecnmececdeecstecinscheenausttentbancecccearasencens 150 Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver WiNdOWS 0 cee cesses eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeee 151 Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver WiINdOWS ccecceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeneeea 152 Synchronizing Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver WindOWS eeeeeeeeeees 156 Selecting Basic Print Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows cceeeeteeeeeeees 158 Selecting A
349. s Inc All rights reserved This software was written by Frank van der Linden of Wasabi Systems for Zembu Labs Inc http Awww zembu com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of Wasabi Systems Inc may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WASABI SYSTEMS INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL WASABI SYSTEMS INC BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSS
350. s Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in the DRD Setting If you select On or a ring pattern other than All Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto 254 10 On the Receive Mode Setting screen do one of the following e If you have connected an external telephone or answering machine to the product select Yes and go to the next step If you did not connect an external telephone or answering machine select No and go to step 12 Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto otherwise you cannot receive faxes 11 On the next Receive Mode Setting screen select Yes to receive faxes automatically or select No to receive faxes manually Note If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically make sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct If you select to receive faxes manually you need to answer every call and operate the product s control panel or your phone to receive faxes 12 On the Confirm Settings screen confirm the displayed settings and select Proceed or press X back to change the settings 13 On the Run Check Fax Connection screen select Start and follow the on screen instructions to check the fax connection and print a report of the check result If there are any errors reported try the solutions on the report and run the check again Note e Ifthe Select Line Type screen appears select the correct line type e Ifthe Select Dial Tone Detection screen appears sele
351. s License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions
352. s in the Front Cover A If paper has jammed in the front cover follow the steps here to clear the jam 1 Cancel the print job if necessary 2 Open the front cover Caution Be careful to not touch any parts inside the product to prevent damage to it 4 Close the front cover Note If any torn pieces of paper remain in the product select Setup gt Maintenance gt Remove Paper after clearing the paper jam error 367 5 Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages If you still see a paper jam message check the other paper jam solutions Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 If paper has jammed in the rear paper feed slot carefully remove the paper Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit Document Jams in the Au
353. s n serie Mair eaten iaecw E E R e aut A 350 Running a Product CheCk eiei e a a a R a 354 Resetting Control Panel Defaults vcsceecececiesceceseuss einide ied ensedeedecuhd oaep lan aedenee poem eeeeeil eee ced eel 356 Solving Setup Problem Sirari aa hacen aati maria aie ad ae aed eee 357 Product Does Not Turn On or Otten 27 ctenaed oS cece saucer tee daecqes aueraes aaa enmadecnee gies enue ms eecnaucercmuane 357 NOISE ATION Ink Installations mina ae ae a setae deat eae 357 Software Installation Problems cccessceeeesecceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeesaaaeeeeseaaaeeesnsaeeeeeeneaaeeenaas 358 Solving Network Problems aa ocd a ceed dues Soe netics ote tact E Ea ttl ole ane Bes te tee Seat sn 358 Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 359 Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network c ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeeeee 360 Product Does Not Appear in OS X Printer WindOW cccecscceeesseeceeeeeceeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeenaees 361 Cannot Print Over a Network iu i2tc cid ecsdeceurecocttcecepeadece laud inte es acochntataa ten eon eiccanutccendeecuntats Ennen nenen 361 CannotsGanm Over a NetWork isar seat etre ac a ota pada om sees aioe AS 363 Solving Copying ProDlOmMs x serasi nenni a ea a Ea paa aiaa e araea aaea paaa aa ataa ARREA 364 Product Makes Noise But Nothing COpieS ssssseessseeesennesseressrrrnstrrnnerrnntrtnnnrssrrress
354. s or change these setting contact your administrator for assistance 1 Press the f home button if necessary 259 2 Select Setup ie Ei e bl Selup Ink Levels Paper Setup _ Print Status Sheet Network Status 4 Scroll down and select Fax Settings You see a screen like this fy Fin Settings User Default Sellings 260 5 Select the group of settings you want to change User Default Settings Fax Send Settings Fax Receive Settings Fax Output Settings Fax Basic Settings Fax Security Settings Fax Parent topic Setting Up Fax Features User Default Settings Fax Set the default settings you want to use for faxing Setting Options Description i O Resolution Standard Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of outgoing faxes Density me e adjusts the darkness of outgoing faxes Select this option when sending black and white text documents Lets you select from various density levels Document Size Glass Half Letter Letter Sets the size for a document placed on the scanner glass Letter 11x17in 261 Setting Options Description i ADF 2 Sided loff Select On to enable 2 sided faxing from the ADF The Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled fon when you turn on this setting Direct Send Off sd Select On to send black and white faxes to a single recipient as soon as the connection is made without saving the scanned image to memor
355. sary Select Start Fax on the LCD screen Select Send arrow hr Note Your product now communicates with the recipient s fax machine Do not hang up the telephone 6 When you hear a fax tone press one of the buttons to start sending the fax Note If your recipient s fax machine does not print in color your fax is automatically sent in black and white 7 Hang up the telephone Parent topic Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related topics Placing Originals on the Product 291 Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility Windows You can send a fax from a printing program in Windows You can fax up to 100 pages at a time including a cover sheet 1 Open the file you want to fax and select the print command You see a window like this Select Prirter By Add Printer 5 EPSON SSE Print to file Preferences gt Fing Printer Select your product with the FAX option as the printer 3 Tochange the Paper Size Orientation Color Image Quality or Character Density settings click the Preferences or Properties button Note If you see a Setup Printer or Options button click it Then click Preferences or Properties on the next screen For more information about selecting fax print settings click Help 4 Select the Page Range as necessary Leave the Number of copies set to 1 5 Click Print or OK 292 If you re faxing for the first time you
356. sclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Apple Computer Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 460 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 1 CMU UCD copyright notice BSD like Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its docu
357. se in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 1995 1996 1997 and 1998 WIDE Project Copyright C 2008 Timo Teras lt timo t
358. select the removable disk icon e OS X with a USB connection Look for the removable disk icon on your desktop then select it 311 OS X with a network connection Select the hard drive icon on your desktop or select Computer from the Go menu select your product in the SHARED section of the sidebar you may need to widen the sidebar to see the name and select the USBSTORAGE icon 4 Select the folder that contains your files 5 Drag the files you want to transfer to the desired folder on your computer or on your flash drive Note Your product s LCD screen does not update to display new information about your flash drive after you copy files to it or delete files from it Remove and insert the flash drive to update the information Parent topic Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive Related tasks Inserting a USB Flash Drive 312 Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during print head cleaning When an ink cartridge is expended or the maintenance box is at the end of its service life you need to replace it You may also need to replace a cartridge that is more than six months old if your printouts do not look their best even after cleaning and aligning the print head Note Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink cartridges and maintenance boxes responsibly and in accordance with local requirements If you would like to return your used ink cart
359. sly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canadian Users 1 This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications 2 The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B Le pr sent mat riel est conforme aux sp cifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada L indice d quivalence de la sonnerie IES sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccord s a une interface t l phonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs a la seule condition que la somme d indices d quivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n exc de pas 5 CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B Parent topic Notices Related tasks Using the Fax Setup Wizard 442 Software Notice 1 This printer product includes open source software programs according to the license terms of each open source software program 2 We provide the source code of some of these open softwares until five 5 years after the discontinuation of same model of this printer product If you desire to receive the source code above please contact the customer suppor
360. snnnnssrtrnsere rnent 381 Nothing Prints Using the Postscript Printing Software ssseeeseseesseerssenrnsserrnrerrnnerennnrsrrenssrrrnsere 381 11 Documents Print Incorrectly Using the Postscript Printing Software cceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeee 382 Accessing Printer Properties Postscript WiINGOWS c seccseceeeceeceecceeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 382 Solving Problems Printing from a COMpUtED ccescceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeneaeeeeeeeaaaeeeenaas 383 PUIG PNM feo cea heen cca Pace coe colts reeset att ates d aot cemgurpads Coe tetas E 383 Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar cceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeea 384 PE RENUUING IS SHOW od cee Se ne ee So SAS A E eh ae eee A dae ah cae E nade oe EA 385 Solving Page Layout and Content Problems ccccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeaeeeeeeaaaeeeenaes 386 Inverted IMaAJE s speis a oa a aaa AE ANARE KE aE aA eR ial AAE KEk 386 HOO MANY Copies Prini eeren ensa eunana aten eaea A EErEE AAEE OA sted deceuaesbedineiandtueanenet 387 Blank Pages Printarar iana a e a eaa A AE A ANE TR aS 387 Incorrect Margins on Printout eeeeeeseseerrreeeeeeiirrtteteetintnssssttintntttttttttttttetetttnnnnesttnnnnnnaneennn 388 Incorrect Chara ters PriNt taren e a a a a a 388 Incorrect Image Size or Position fassezecteeces ede ta eeeteenceh ca ele ean ceacdalincd Qeatea aasde te dedendidea
361. ss the i Status button 2 Select Printer Information You see a screen like this Ready Cl i es eE The ink and maintenance box levels are displayed at the bottom of the screen Note The displayed ink and maintenance box levels are approximate 3 For more information select the ink cartridge images at the bottom of the screen Parent topic Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status Related tasks Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges Replacing the Maintenance Box Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with Windows A low ink reminder appears if you try to print when ink is low and you can check your cartridge or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows computer 1 To check your status access the Windows Desktop double click the product icon in the Windows taskbar and click Details 314 You see this window EPSON Itis ready to pant Black Yelow Magenta Maintenance Box Service Life 4 A oc a 2 Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink cartridge as indicated on the screen Note If any of the cartridges installed in the product is broken incompatible with the product model or improperly installed Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate cartridge status 3 To disable the low ink reminder right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar and select Monitoring Preferences 315 You see this window M Error O Communica
362. t Incorrect Characters Print Incorrect Image Size or Position Slanted Printout Parent topic Solving Problems Inverted Image If your printed image is inverted unexpectedly try these solutions e Turn off any mirror or inversion settings in your printing application e Turn off the Mirror Image Flip horizontally or Reverse page orientation settings in your printer software This option has different names depending on your operating system version Note Leave these options turned on when you print on Epson Iron on Cool Peel Transfer paper if available for your product Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems 386 Related tasks Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Too Many Copies Print Make sure that the Copies setting in your printing program or printer software is not set for multiple copies Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Blank Pages Print If blank pages print unexpectedly try these solutions e Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software e Ifa blank page exists in a document you are printing and you want to skip printing it select the Skip Blank Page setting in your printer software e Runa print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged Then clean th
363. t from a Chromebook without drivers or cables Set up your Epson product for network printing as described in this manual See the link below Note Make sure your Epson product is connected to your wireless network before starting the Google Cloud Print setup 1 Turn on your Chromebook and connect it to the same wireless network as your product Note See your Chromebook s documentation for details on connecting to a network 2 Doone of the following Click Add to Cloud Print in the notification that appears in the corner of your Chromebook screen Note If you do not see a notification check to see if anumber appears in the status area at the lower right corner of the screen Click this number to open the notifications menu then click Add to Cloud Print Open a web browser and enter chrome devices in the address bar Skip to step 4 3 Click Add Device Click the Register button that appears next to your product 43 5 Click Register on the confirmation screen Your product s LCD screen displays a confirmation message 6 Select OK or press the OK button on your product to confirm the Google Cloud Print connection and print a test page Your product is now linked to your Google Account and can be accessed from any Chromebook iPhone or Android phone with Internet access For more information on using Google Cloud Print visit Epson Support Parent topic Using Google Cloud Print Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networ
364. t from any device that can send email such as your smartphone tablet or laptop Just activate your product s unique email address When you want to print attach a PDF Microsoft Office document or photo to an email and send it to your product 1 Setup your product for network printing as described in this manual See the link below 39 If you did not already set up Email Print when you installed your product software visit epson com connect to learn more about Email Print check compatibility and get detailed setup instructions Send an email with attachments to your product s Email Print address Note Both the email and any attachments print by default You can change these printing options by logging into your Epson Connect account Parent topic Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and More Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Using the Epson iPrint Mobile App Use this free Apple and Android app to print to nearby Epson networked products The Epson iPrint Mobile App lets you print PDFs Microsoft Office documents photos and web pages over a wireless network You can even scan and save a file on your device send it as an email or upload it to an online service such as Box Dropbox Evernote or Google Drive 1 2 3 4 5 Set up your product on a network as described in this manual See the link below Visit epson com connect to learn more about Epson iPrint and check the compatibility of you
365. t itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify
366. t of your region You shall comply with the license terms of each open source software program 3 The open source software programs are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the license agreements of each open source software program for more details which are described below GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source cod
367. t or an equivalent medium or placing the modifications on a major network archive site allowing unrestricted access to them or by allowing the Copyright Holder to include your modifications in the Standard Version of the Package b use the modified Package only within your corporation or organization c rename any non standard executables so the names do not conflict with standard executables which must also be provided and provide a separate manual page for each non standard executable that clearly documents how it differs from the Standard Version d make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder e permit and encourage anyone who receives a copy of the modified Package permission to make your modifications Freely Available in some specific way 4 You may distribute the programs of this Package in object code or executable form provided that you do at least ONE of the following a distribute a Standard Version of the executables and library files together with instructions in the manual page or equivalent on where to get the Standard Version 476 b accompany the distribution with the machine readable source of the Package with your modifications c give non standard executables non standard names and clearly document the differences in manual pages or equivalent together with instructions on where to get the Standard Version d make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder e offer
368. t out of your photo or document select the Booklet option Click the Paper Quality tab 175 You see this window Layout Paper Qualty Tray Selection Paper Source Media Color a e Black amp White 10 Select the Paper Source that matches where you loaded the paper you want to print on 11 Select Plain as the Media setting 12 Select one of the following as the Color setting To print a color document or photo select the Color setting To print text and graphics in black only select the Black amp White setting Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software Windows Related references Paper Source Options Windows 176 Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options PostScript Printer Software Windows You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo by clicking the Advanced button om EPSON PS3 Series Advanced Document Settings Paper Output Leter Copy Count 1 Copy u Graphic Print Quality Eins z Image Color Management ICM Method ICM Disabled ICM Intent Pictures Scaling 100 TrueType Font Substitute with Device Font ff Document Options Advanced Printing Features Enabled Pages per Sheet Layout Right then Down Booklet Binding Edge On Left Edge H A PostScript Options Z Printer Features Color Mode Color Press Simulation Auto Semulstion Method Off Pure Black Mode On Cancel Select the size of the
369. t the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a d
370. t three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution 453 d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the wo
371. t your fax and network data and settings 1 Press the f home button if necessary 2 Press F 3 Select Wi Fi Setup You see a screen like this fit Wi Fi Seiup AEF Setup Wizard Push Button Setup CAPS FAN Code Setup WPS a 1 l 46 4 Select Wi Fi Setup Wizard Note If you need to disable the wireless network to set up your product on an Ethernet network scroll down and select Disable Wi Fi instead Then follow the instructions on changing to a wired network connection in this guide 5 Select the name of your wireless network or enter the name manually Note To enter the wireless network name manually select Other Networks and select the Network SSID field Use the displayed keypad to enter your network name 6 Select the Password field and enter your wireless password using the displayed keypad Note The network name and password are case sensitive Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and lowercase letters and numeric or special characters Press a or Le to move the cursor Press lial to change the case of letters Press lt a to delete the previous character Press to enter numbers and symbols Press to enter a space 7 Press E when you finish entering your password and select Proceed 47 8 Confirm the displayed network settings and select OK to save them Note If you need to change a setting press the 5 back button 9 If you want to print a network setup report
372. talic AntiqueOlive Bold AntiqueOlive Compact Apple Chancery 421 ITC AvantGarde Gothic Book ITC AvantGarde Gothic Book Oblique ITC AvantGarde Gothic Demi ITC AvantGarde Gothic Demi Oblique Courier Courier Oblique Courier Bold Courier Bold Oblique GillSans GillSans Italic GillSans Bold GillSans Bold Italic GillSansCondensed GillSans Condensed Bold GillSans Light GillSans Light Italic GillSans Extra Bold Eurostile Eurostile Bold Eurostile Extended Two Eurostile Bold Extended Two Goudy Oldstyle Goudy Oldstyle Italic Goudy Bold Goudy Boldltalic Goudy ExtraBold Helvetica Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Oblique Helvetica Condensed Helvetica Condensed Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Hoefler Text Hoefler Text Italic Hoefler Text Black Hoefler Text Black Italic Hoefler Text Ornaments Joanna Joanna Italic Joanna Bold Joanna Bold Italic LetterGothic LetterGothic Slanted LetterGothic Bold LetterGothic Bold Slanted Demi Oblique New Century Schoolbook Roman New Century Schoolbook Italic New Century Schoolbook Bold New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic Stempel Garamond Roman Stempel Garamond Italic Stempel Garamond Bold Stempel Garamond Bold Italic Symbol Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Univers Univers Oblique Univers Bold Univ
373. te 253 Selecting THE Lie TY DC ewisie ccadered ee itet aen e at arnae a omen natant al tant T 255 Setting the Number of Rings to Answer ccccceeseeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeesnseeeeeesaeaeeneaaes 257 Selecting Advanced Fax Settings vices sesvecascvenestecoeeeserenzs caste oxayeaettnces vhepetay ieee eeventeeadeudeencleterass 259 User Default Settings FaX asccoe caps tecaseieelarashtatenscaiie aeiereenastiden Tocieaatla tate ade aedlacetndans 261 ONG SOUINGS FAM tee itt oles oie aed ee eee E stone deat dedhs E 262 Re eive Settings AK aprenia ccs toa Sad tga aits Grete Cranes She aed wane eset 262 Output Settings FaX et As ee ee ee gett eee este masta te eae tad ae NS eee Ue ae Fae 263 BASIC SUING Sa AK sree cat set diad eet Mec ate dle be Scan E es il acer ele cake tena tal lit 265 DOCUIItY SOMINGS FAX cies becca E a E a tig a e aE a Ea EEEE 266 Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility WiINdGOWS cccccceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeteeeeeees 267 Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility OS Xo cece cece ee eenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeneees 268 Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups ccccceeescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeteaeeeeeesaaaeeseaeeeeeeeaaeeeeniaas 269 Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel ccccccccceceesseseeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeesenaaaes 270 Creating a COMAGCE sieer caceateciy nosh na eeaeee EAE e EEE cet vexsaedaianiediveeesttisensa neces rune 270
374. te Branch Exchange the type of phone line used in office environments where an access code such as 9 must be used to call an outside line Header Select to enter the header information and your Your Phone phone number for inclusion on outgoing faxes Number Parent topic Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Security Settings Fax Set the security options you want to use for fax data Setting Options Description S Direct Dialing C Does not restrict dialed fax numbers Restrictions Allows faxing only to numbers stored in the contacts list or history Requires you to enter fax numbers twice to prevent errors Confirm Address List C Selects whether or not to display a recipient lon maon screen before a fax is sent Inbox Password Select to set a password for viewing incoming faxes Settings 266 Setting Options Description S Backup Data Auto Clear Off Automatically erases sent or received fax data from on o your product s memory Clear Backup Data Deletes all sent or received fax data remaining in your product s memory run this function if you are giving away or disposing of your product Parent topic Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility Windows You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for Windows 1 Doone of the following Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen Windows other versions Click amp or Start gt Pr
375. th blank pages or barcodes inserted where you want to start a new scanned file 2 Doone of the following to start Document Capture Pro Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro Windows other versions Click or Start and select All Programs or Programs Select EPSON Software then select Document Capture Pro You see this window e san bet yes Page Option bielp Scan gt vot l Scan to POF f Onstination 3 Click the E Scan icon 240 o o NOD Select any displayed scan settings you want to use Note See the Help information in Document Capture Pro for details Click Scan You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture Pro window Open the File menu and select Batch Save Click File Name Settings Select Apply Job Separation and click Separation Settings Select the method you used to separate the originals select a folder name specification and click OK Select any other settings from the File Name settings window as necessary and click OK 11 Select any other settings from the Batch Save window as necessary and click OK Your originals are saved into separate files as specified Note You can also create a scan job for scanning multi page originals as separate scanned files You can use the scan job when you scan with Document Capture Pro or when you scan using the Document Capture Pro option on the product control panel Parent topic Scanning Speci
376. the making using practicing selling offering for sale and or otherwise disposing of the ECC Code as delivered hereunder or portions thereof provided that such covenant shall not apply 1 for code that a licensee deletes from the ECC Code 2 separates from the ECC Code or 3 for infringements caused by i the modification of the ECC Code or ii the combination of the ECC Code with other software or devices where such combination causes the infringement The software is originally written by Sheueling Chang Shantz and Douglas Stebila of Sun Microsystems Laboratories NOTE This file is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL license below and may be modified but after modifications the above covenant may no longer apply In such cases the corresponding paragraph In addition Sun covenants causes the infringement and this note can be edited out but please keep the Sun copyright notice and attribution Copyright Patrick Powell 1995 This code is based on code written by Patrick Powell lt papowell astart com gt It may be used for any purpose as long as this notice remains intact on all source code distributions This code contains numerious changes and enhancements which were made by lots of contributors over the last years to Patrick Powell s original code o Patrick Powell lt papowell astart com gt 1995 o Brandon Long lt blong fiction net gt 1996 for Mutt o Thomas Roessler lt roessler guug de gt 1998 for Mu
377. the paper support and output tray NO a Ww If you transporting the product a short distance remove the optional cabinet and paper cassettes if they are installed before lifting the product Note If the optional cabinet is installed you can use the casters on the cabinet to roll the product instead of lifting it Remove the cabinet stands and unlock the casters before moving the product Do not roll the product over uneven or rough surfaces to avoid harsh impacts to the product 8 If you are transporting the product over a long distance place the product in its original packing materials if possible or use equivalent materials with cushioning around the product Make sure the box adequately protects the product control panel Keep the product level during transportation If print quality has declined when you print again clean and align the print head Parent topic Cleaning and Transporting Your Product Related concepts Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Related tasks Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges 347 Solving Problems Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product Checking for Software Updates Product Status Messages Status Menu Error Codes Running a Product Check Resetting Control Panel Defaults Solving Setup Problems Solving Network Problems Solving Copying Problems Solving Paper Problems Solving PostScript Printing Problems Solving Problems Printing
378. this window se Network printer search ne Driver Settings Current Printer Information Printer Information Acqure Som Printer C Only Options Information AdActter Color Standard Ressluten 600 Defauit of Printer Control Language Mangal Setengs EPR Auto Duplexer Installed tretaled Confidential Job lt 3 Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get Note Select the Only Optional Information checkbox if you only want to enable optional equipment such as an optional cassette unit The product s settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area 4 Click OK Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes PostScript Printer Software Windows 157 Selecting Basic Print Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print 1 Open a photo or document for printing 2 Select the print command in your application Note You may need to select a print icon on your screen the Print option in the File menu or another command See your application s help utility for details 3 If necessary select EPSON Universal Print Driver as the printer you want to use Note You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings You see the Main tab of your printer sett
379. tion Restores the colors in faded photos automatically Quiet Mode Reduces noise during scanning and may reduce scan speed Parent topic Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture 237 Scanning Special Projects Your product s scanning software offers various options to help you quickly complete special scan projects Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service Scanning Multi Page Originals as Separate Files Parent topic Scanning Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service You can use Document Capture Pro to upload scanned images to a SharePoint server or a cloud service 1 Doone of the following to start Document Capture Pro Windows 8 x Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro Windows other versions Click amp or Start and select All Programs or Programs Select EPSON Software then select Document Capture Pro e OS X Open the Applications folder select the Epson Software folder and select Document Capture Select your product and click OK if necessary You see a window like this De on et Yew Boge Option ihip Sean gt fob l Scan to POF Tag Onstination 238 Click the Sean icon Select any displayed scan settings you want to use Note See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details Click Scan You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture Pro or Document Capture window Click one of the cloud service Destinati
380. tion Error Printer Selection Error O Ink Low V Simple status notification Select Shortcut Icon V Register the shortcut icon to the taskbar Double cicking the Shortcut Icon opens the Printer Status Window _ Allow monitoring of shared printers V See Low Ink Reminder alerts V Display Epson Offers Share my usage information with Epson 4 Deselect the See Low Ink Reminder alerts checkbox at the bottom of the screen 5 Todisable promotional offers deselect the Display Epson Offers checkbox 6 Click OK Parent topic Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status Related tasks Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges 316 Replacing the Maintenance Box Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with OS X You can check the status of your ink cartridges and maintenance box using a utility on your Mac 1 Doone of the following e OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility e OS X 10 5 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax select your product and select Open Print Queue Select Utility 2 Select EPSON Status Monitor 317 You see this window eo Epson Printer Utility 4 Buy Epson Ink EPSON son EPSON Status Monitor Back Magenta Cya
381. tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 3 Cambridge Broadband Ltd copyright notice BSD Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 2003 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of co
382. tions to it Fora library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from sucha program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these
383. tly running on your Mac Double click the Uninstaller icon Select the checkbox for each software program you want to uninstall Click Uninstall Follow the on screen instructions to uninstall the software To reinstall your product software see the Start Here sheet for instructions 408 Note If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners window select your product name and click the remove icon to remove it Parent topic When to Uninstall Your Product Software Where to Get Help If you need to contact Epson for technical support services use the following support options Internet Support Visit Epson s support website at epson com support U S or epson ca support Canada for solutions to common problems You can download drivers and documentation get FAQs and troubleshooting advice or e mail Epson with your questions Speak to a Support Representative Before you call Epson for support please have the following information ready e Product name Product serial number located on a label on the product e Proof of purchase such as a store receipt and date of purchase e Computer configuration e Description of the problem Then call e U S 562 276 4382 6 AM to 8 PM Pacific Time Monday through Friday and 7 AM to 4 PM Pacific Time Saturday e Canada 905 709 3839 6 AM to 8 PM Pacific Time Monday through Fri
384. to view the SSID Wi Fi network name and password Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi Fi network name SSID displayed on the LCD screen then enter the password shown Press the ff home button to exit You see either an AP or Direct connection symbol on the LCD screen and should be able to print directly to your product from your computer or device Note If the AP or Direct connection symbol is not displayed on the LCD screen Wi Fi Direct mode is not enabled Repeat these steps to try again Parent topic Wi Fi Direct Mode Setup Related references Status Icon Information Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen 51 Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS If your network uses a WPS enabled wireless router or access point you can quickly connect your product to the network using Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Note To check if your router is WPS enabled look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access point If there is no hardware button there may be a virtual WPS button in the software for the device Check your network product documentation for details Using WPS to Connect to a Network Parent topic Wi Fi or Wired Networking Using WPS to Connect to a Network If you have a WPS enabled wireless router or access point you can use Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS to connect your product to the network 1 Press the home button if necessary 2 Press F 3 Select Wi Fi Setup You see a scree
385. tomatic Document Feeder F Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot B2 If paper has jammed in the front paper feed slot follow the steps here to clear the jam 1 Cancel the print job if necessary 368 2 Close the output tray 3 Remove the output tray and pull out the paper cassette Te 4 Pull the lever to lower the cover 369 7 8 Carefully remove any paper jammed inside the product Raise the cover Reattach the output tray and insert the paper cassette Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages If you still see a paper jam message check the other paper jam solutions Parent topic Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover A Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot B1 Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 D1 Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover E of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit 370 Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder F Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette C1 C2 C3 C4 If paper has jammed in the cassette follow the steps here to clear the jam Note If the optional paper cassette units are installed do not remove more than one paper cassette at a time 1 Cancel the print job if necessary 2 Pull out the paper cassette 371 3 Carefully remove any paper jammed insi
386. topic Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings Printing a PS3 PostScript Status Sheet You can print a PS3 PostScript status sheet to confirm the current font information and PostScript printing software version 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Setup You see a screen like this ink Levels Mainbendnbe Paper Setup _ Print Status Sheet Network Status 3 Select Print Status Sheet 4 Select PS3 Status Sheet 5 Press one of the buttons to print the status sheet Parent topic Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver PCL or PostScript Printing 65 Loading Paper Before you print load paper for the type of printing you will do Note Load only plain paper when printing with the PostScript PS3 printer software Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot Paper Loading Capacity Available Epson Papers Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source Control Panel Selecting Default Paper Settings Administrator Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes Loading Paper in the Cassette You can load paper up to this size in the paper cassette A3 11 7 x 16 5 inches 297 x 420 mm Note If the optional paper cassette units are installed do not remove more than one cassette at a time 66 1 Make sure the product is not operati
387. tt o Michael Elkins lt me cs hmc edu gt 1998 for Mutt 468 o Andrew Tridgell lt tridge samba org gt 1998 for Samba o Luke Mewburn lt lukem netbsd org gt 1999 for LukemFTP o Ralf S Engelschall lt rse engelschall com gt 1999 for Pth o for OpenSSL Copyright c 2010 2010 Intel Corp Author Vinodh Gopal intel com Jim Guilford Erdinc Ozturk intel com Maxim Perminov intel com Ying Huang intel com Copyright c 2002 Bob Beck lt beck openbsd org gt Copyright c 2002 Theo de Raadt Copyright c 2002 Markus Friedl All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMEN
388. tting ue ae So 323 9 Select the Black Grayscale checkbox Click OK Print your document Epson Status Monitor 3 displays a print message Click Print in Black to print your document Parent topic Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges Printing with Expended Color Cartridges OS X If printing stops you can cancel your print job and select settings to temporarily print with only black ink on plain paper or on an envelope 1 2 Click the printer icon in the Dock If you see a message telling you that you can cic E lice with only black ink click the Delete icon to cancel your print job OS X 10 8 10 9 Click the message is displayed click OK icon to cancel your print job If an error Note If the message screen appears on another computer on a network you may need to cancel the print job using the product control panel In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Driver or Options 324 You see a screen like this General Options Supply Levels Utility To take full advantage of your printer s options confirm that they are accurately shown here For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the printer s documentation Thick paper and envelopes Of Skip Blank Page Quiet Mode Permit temporary black printi
389. ttings using the preview as a guide There are two types of preview available depending on the scan mode and selected settings Thumbnail preview A thumbnail preview displays your previewed images as thumbnails with the scanned image area and exposure automatically selected Normal preview A normal preview displays your previewed images in their entirety so you can select the scanned image area and other settings manually Parent topic Selecting Epson Scan Settings Scan Resolution Guidelines If you plan to enlarge a scanned image so you can print it at a larger size you may need to increase the resolution from the default resolution set by Epson Scan Follow these guidelines to determine the resolution setting you need e You will enlarge the image as you scan it If you will enlarge the image using Epson Scan s Target Size setting you do not need to increase the Resolution setting 230 e You will scan the image at its original size but enlarge it later in an image editing program Increase Epson Scan s Resolution setting in your scan Increase the resolution by the same amount you will increase the image size to retain a high image quality For example if the resolution is 300 dpi dots per inch and you will double the image size later change the Resolution setting to 600 dpi e You will scan the image at 100 or smaller size Select Epson Scan s Resolution setting based on how you will use the scanned image e Email view o
390. ty Fine Cancel Print 11 Select Plain as the MediaType setting Note The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes e A4 8 3 x 11 7 inches 210 x 297 mm e Letter 8 5 x 11 inches 216 x 279 mm e No 10 4 1 x 9 5 inches 105 x 241 mm 12 Select one of the following Print Quality options For fast printing with reduced quality select Fast For printing text and graphics with good quality and print speed select Fine For the best printing with reduced speed select Maximum 13 Select Color from the Feature Sets pop up menu 185 You see these settings Printer Features Feature Sets Color Color Mode Color Press Simulation Auto Simulation Method Off Pure Black Mode On Cancel Print 14 Select a Color Mode option To print a color document or photo select the Color setting To print text and graphics in black only select the Monochrome setting 15 Select any of the available print options Parent topic Printing with the PostScript PS3 Printer Software OS X Related tasks Selecting Page Setup Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X Selecting Print Layout Options PostScript Printer Software OS X Printing Your Document or Photo PostScript Printer Software OS X 186 Selecting Page Setup Settings PostScript Printer Software OS X Depending on your application you may be able to select the
391. uality Options Windows Multi Page Printing Options Windows Parent topic Printing with Windows Related references Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Related tasks Selecting Double sided Printing Settings Windows Printing Your Document or Photo Windows Entering a User ID and Password for Printing 114 Paper Source Options Windows You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that source Note Paper Cassette 2 through Paper Cassette 4 are available only if you have installed the optional cassettes Auto Select Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size Paper Cassette 1 Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source Paper Cassette 2 Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source Paper Cassette 3 Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source Paper Cassette 4 Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source Rear Paper Feed Slot Selects the paper in the rear feed slot as the paper source Front Paper Feed Slot Selects the paper in the front feed slot as the paper source Parent topic Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Print Quality Options Windows You can select any of the available Quality options to fine tune the quality of your print Some settings may be unavailable depending on the paper type and border setting you have chosen Draft For draft printing on plain paper St
392. uch altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip Bugs or Info ZIP e mail addresses or the Info ZIP URL s such as to imply Info ZIP will provide support for the altered versions 4 Info ZIP retains the right to use the names Info ZIP Zip UnZip UnZipSFX WiZ Pocket UnZip Pocket Zip and MacZip for its own source and binary releases Copyright C The Internet Society 1999 All Rights Reserved This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to others and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in its implementation may be prepared copied published and distributed in whole or in part without restriction of any kind provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are included on all such copies and derivative works However this document itself may not be modified in any way such as by removing the copyright notice or references to the Internet Society or other Internet organisations except as needed for the purpose of developing Internet standards in which case the procedures for copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process shall be followed or as required to translate it into languages other than English The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns This document and the information contained herein is provided on an AS IS basis and THE INT
393. uct is not printing while tilted or at an angle Parent topic Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings OS X Related topics Loading Paper Solving Print Quality Problems Check these sections if your printouts have problems with print quality but your image looks fine on your computer screen Note When printing using AirPrint the available print settings are different from those covered in this manual See the Apple website for details White or Dark Lines in Printout 389 Blurry or Smeared Printout Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps Grainy Printout Incorrect Colors Parent topic Solving Problems White or Dark Lines in Printout If you notice white or dark lines in your prints also called banding try these solutions before you reprint Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged Then clean the print head if necessary Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product Turn off any high speed settings in your product software Align the print head You may need to replace the ink cartridges Parent topic Solving Print Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Related references Paper or Media Type Settings Printing Software Relat
394. umber you want to use for the group you are adding 274 You see a screen like this Auld Group Hane Index Ford Hot Entered Cancel 7 Select the Name field use the displayed keyboard to enter the group name up to 30 characters and press 8 Select the Index Word field use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for a group up to 30 characters and press E This field is optional 9 Select Proceed You see your contacts list 10 Select the number next to each contact you want to include in your group A check mark appears next to each selected contact 11 Select Save Parent topic Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel Editing or Deleting a Contact Group You can edit an existing contact group to add or delete entries You can also delete the entire contact group 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Fax 275 You see a screen like this Comiacts History On Honk te Preset 3 Select Contacts Enter the administrator password if necessary You see a screen like this showing both individual contacts and contact groups Proceed 4 Select the group you want to edit 276 You see a screen like this Details Mane Bonk chub Index Word is To poi ABC Delete Note If you want to delete the entire group select Delete 5 To edit the group select Edit 6 Select Proceed You see a list of the contacts in your grou
395. ument to test the selected settings 5 Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing Double sided Printing Options and Adjustments OS X Parent topic Printing with OS X Double sided Printing Options and Adjustments OS X You can select any of the available options in the Two sided Printing Settings or Output Settings pop up menu to set up your double sided print job 145 Two sided Printing Options Long Edge binding Orients double sided printed pages to be bound on the long edge of the paper Short Edge binding Orients double sided printed pages to be bound on the short edge of the paper Adjustments Print Density Sets the level of ink coverage for double sided printing Increased Ink Drying Time Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing the other side in double sided printing Parent topic Selecting Double sided Printing Settings OS X Managing Color OS X You can adjust the Color Matching and Color Options settings to fine tune the colors in your printout or turn off color management in your printer software 1 Select Color Matching from the pop up menu in the print window Color Matching ColorSync EPSON Color Controls 2 Select one of the available options 146 3 Select Color Options from the pop up menu in the print window Color Options Manual Settings Fix Photo Off No Color Adjustment gt Ad
396. unt and your product with Epson Connect After registering sign in to the Epson Connect web page with the email address and password you selected Select Destination List for Scan to Cloud Click Add then follow the instructions on the screen to create your destination list When you re ready to scan select the setting for the Scan to Cloud service on your product control panel Parent topic Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones Tablets and More Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Using AirPrint AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print to your AirPrint enabled product from your iOS device running the latest version of iOS and from your Mac running OS X 10 7 or later 41 1 Setup your product for wireless printing as described in this manual See the link below 2 Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using 3 Print from your device to your product Note For details see the AirPrint page on the Apple website Parent topic Product Basics Related topics Wi Fi or Wired Networking Using Google Cloud Print With a Google Account you can print from your Apple or Android device to your Epson product You can also print from Chromebooks and the Google Chrome browser without drivers or cables Set up your Epson product for network printing as described in this manual See the link below Note Make sure your Epson printer and computer are connected to the same network befor
397. ur product answers a call to a number that is higher than your answering machine s setting for the number of rings Any phone or answering machine must be connected to the EXT port for your product to detect an incoming fax call when the phone is picked up Epson cannot guarantee compatibility with VoIP cable phone systems or fiberoptic digital services such as FIOS Parent topic Faxing Related tasks Receiving Faxes Automatically 248 Setting Up Fax Features Before faxing with your product set up your fax header and select the fax features you want to use Note If you leave your product unplugged for a long period of time you may need to reset the date and time settings for faxes Setting Up Basic Fax Features Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility Windows Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility OS X Parent topic Faxing Setting Up Basic Fax Features See these sections to select the basic settings you need to use the product s fax features Selecting Your Country or Region Selecting the Date and Time Using the Fax Setup Wizard Selecting the Line Type Setting the Number of Rings to Answer Parent topic Setting Up Fax Features Selecting Your Country or Region Before faxing select the country or region in which you are using your product Note If you change the country or region your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select them again This settin
398. ut of the reach of children and do not drink the ink Be careful when you handle used ink cartridges there may be ink remaining around the ink supply port If ink gets on your skin wash it off with soap and water If it gets in your eyes flush them immediately with water Do not put your hand inside the product or touch any cartridges during printing Install a new ink cartridge immediately after removing an expended one Leaving cartridges uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing Do not remove or tear the label on the cartridge this can cause leakage Do not remove the transparent seal from the bottom of the cartridge This may cause the cartridge to become unusable Do not break the hooks on the side of the cartridge when removing it from the packaging Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the cartridge This may prevent normal operation Do not shake cartridges after opening their packages this can cause them to leak If you remove an ink cartridge for later use protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in the same environment as the product Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port making covers or plugs unnecessary but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge touches Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area Use an ink cartridge before the date printed on its package Do not dismantle an ink cart
399. utput tray Edge guides Paper cassette N OO ff W PD Parent topic Product Parts Locations 32 Product Parts Inside Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code If you encounter any paper jams or errors use these codes to locate and correct the problem 1 Document cover 33 Scanner glass Control panel USB Type A port for external devices Print head Front cover A on kk Ww NY Parent topic Product Parts Locations 34 Product Parts Back Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code If you encounter any paper jams or errors use these codes to locate and correct the problem Rear cover 2 D2 AC inlet Rear cover 1 D1 Rear cover E ar OO N gt Service USB port do not remove sticker 35 Line port EXT port LAN port USB port Oo Oo NO Parent topic Product Parts Locations Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period of time You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources Changing the Eco Mode Settings Changing the Sleep Timer Settings Changing the Power Off Timer Settings Parent topic Product Basics Changing the Eco Mode Settings You can use the product s control panel to change the Eco Mode settings Note The Sleep Timer setting in Eco Mode overrides the Sleep Timer setting in the Common Sett
400. vanced Settings Cancel Print Note The available settings on the Color Options menu depend on the option you selected on the Color Matching menu 4 Select one of the available options Color Matching and Color Options OS X Parent topic Printing with OS X Color Matching and Color Options OS X You can select from these settings on the Color Matching and Color Options menus Color Matching Settings EPSON Color Controls Lets you manage color using controls in your printer software or turn off color management ColorSync Prints using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors You can customize the conversion method and filter settings on the ColorSync pop up menu in the print window 147 Color Options Settings Manual Settings Lets you select manual color adjustments Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and select settings for Brightness Contrast Saturation and individual color tones You can also select a color Mode setting for printing photos and graphics and the Fix Red Eye setting to reduce or remove red eye in photos Depending on the selected color mode you can also adjust the midtone density using the Gamma setting Fix Photo Improves the color contrast and sharpness of flawed photos Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and select the Fix Red Eye setting to reduce or remove red eye in photos Note Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology
401. ver turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not be able to print 8 Select Print Nozzle Check Pattern 9 Press the Color button to confirm that the print head is clean If you don t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times wait at least 6 hours without printing or longer if printing Then try cleaning the print head again If quality still does not improve one of the ink cartridges may be old or damaged and needs to be replaced Parent topic Print Head Cleaning Related tasks Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility Related topics Loading Paper Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility You can clean the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer 1 2 Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product Do one of the following Windows Access the Windows Desktop and right click the product icon in the Windows taskbar e OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax Print amp Scan or Printers amp Scanners select your product and select Options amp Supplies Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility e OS X 10 5 In the Apple menu or the Dock select System Preferences Select Print amp Fax select your product and select Open Print Queue Select Utility Select Head Cleaning 335 You see a window like this Cick Start to dean the print hea
402. window 4 Select the checkbox for the function or functions you want to lock To lock all print settings select All Document Settings 5 Under Advanced Settings select the setting you want for each selected function 6 Click OK Epson Universal Print Driver Lock Settings Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Epson Universal Print Driver Lock Settings Select the settings you want to use for locking print functions 168 Printing function Available settings Watermark Various text Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit watermarks watermarks Add Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image based watermark Lets you select the size position color and other watermark w oa Header Footer lott Prohibits headers or Prohibits headers or footers 0 Ons Allows headers and footers Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and or footers Color 2 sided printing Off Allows printing on only one side ofthe paper jon Allows printing on both sides ofthepaper MultiPage Off Prohibits multi page settings 2 Up Prints 2 pages on one sheet of paper Up Prints 4pagesononesheetofpaper Parent topic Locking Printer Settings Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Adding Network Printers Epson Universal Print Driver Windows You can use the Epson Universal Print Driver to find and add network printers 1 Doone of the following e Windows
403. wise without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation The information contained herein is designed only for use with this Epson product Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as applied to other products Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages losses costs or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of 491 accident misuse or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications repairs or alterations to this product or excluding the U S failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation s operating and maintenance instructions Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation This information is subject to change without notice lib TIFF Software Acknowledgment A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products Copyright Attribution Parent topic Notices lib TIFF Software Acknowledgme
404. y You cannot use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a fax to multiple recipients Continuous Scan from Select On to have the product to ask if you want to ADF scan another page after a document in the ADF has finished scanning Transmission Report Lets you select when to print transmission reports Do Not Print Parent topic Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Send Settings Fax Set the send options you want to use for outgoing faxes Auto Rotation Sends an A4 or letter size document that is placed long edge first into the ADF as an A3 size fax Save Failure Data Saves faxes that failed to be sent in the product s memory You can resend the faxes from the product s Status Menu Batch Send Off Sorts outgoing faxes by recipient in the product s lon memory and then sends them as a batch Parent topic Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Receive Settings Fax Set the receive options you want to use for incoming faxes 262 Setting Options Description S Receive Mode Lets you confirm whether an incoming fax should be printed a telephone must be connected to the product Auto Automatically receives and prints faxes Distinctive Ring If you are using a Distinctive Ring Service on your phone line your telephone company can assign two or more phone numbers to the same line and assign Double different ring patterns to each If you use this service select the number of rings for your fax number so your p
405. y adjust the sharpness brightness contrast and color saturation for your image e Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or turn off color management in your printer software e Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images To add the following features click the Watermark Features button Watermark adds a visible watermark to your printout Note Click the Add Delete button to create your own watermark and click the Settings button to customize the watermark e Header Footer adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout Note Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer To add a password to your print job select the Confidential Job checkbox then enter a password Confidential jobs are stored in the product s memory without being printed To print the job enter the password for the confidential job on the product s control panel Note Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product s memory after printing Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print Parent topic Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver Windows Related references Custom Color Correction Options Windows Image Options and Additional Settings Windows Header Footer Settings Windows 161 Selecting Maintenance Options Epson Universal Print Driver
406. y cables and follow the rest of these instructions in reverse 3 Remove the paper cassette unit from its packaging and remove any protective materials 4 Make sure you have all the items shown here 94 5 Remove the output tray and paper cassette from the product i en 6 Remove the paper cassette from the optional paper cassette unit 95 7 Stack all optional paper cassette units on top of each other and secure them to each other with the included screws A Qans o 96 8 Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the paper cassette unit with the corners aligned Secure the product to the paper cassette unit with the included screws using a screw driver ic ACES y 97 Warning To lift the product have two people hold it as shown here Lifting from other areas may cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down 98 9 Secure the back of the paper cassette units to each other and to the product using the included brackets and screws 10 Insert a label into the holder indicating the paper size to be loaded in the paper cassette 99 11 Place the correct sticker on the cassette unit to indicate the cassette number ee aa 12 Connect the power cord and other connection cables then plug in the product 13 Turn on the product 14 Pu
407. y of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More Options tab Document Sre Letter B 1 2 x L1in Output Paper Same as Decustent Size Watermark Featres _ Corifidentsal Job Additonal Settings Rotate 130 Vj High Speed pA Ome me 1 To change the size of your printed document or photo select the Reduce Enlarge Document checkbox and select one of these sizing options e Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded Select the size of the your document or photo as the Document Size setting and the size of your paper as the Output Paper setting If you want to center your image on the paper select the Center option Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage Select the percentage in the menu 2 Select one of the following Color Correction options e Select Automatic to automatically adjust the sharpness brightness contrast and color saturation for your image 120 e Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or turn off color management in your printer software e Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images Note You can also select Color Universal Print settings 3 To add the following features click the Watermark Features button Anti Copy Pattern adds a watermark that only appears when your p
408. you are scanning Text amp Image Adjusts the lightness or darkness of scanned images Document Orientation pt Specifies the orientation of PDF documents Landscape si Compression Ratio High ss Select High for smaller file size or Low for best PDF Settings Document Open Lets you set a password for opening the Password document Permissions Lets you set a password for printing or editing Password the document Attached File Max Size Various sizes Lets you select the maximum file size that can be attached to an email Note When you turn on password settings you can use the LCD screen keyboard to set the password Parent topic Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Creating Contacts for Scanning You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or locations for scanning to a network folder or FTP Note Contacts can be locked by an administrator If you cannot access or change contacts contact your administrator for assistance You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined including fax contacts 1 Press the ff home button if necessary 2 Select Contacts Enter the administrator password if necessary 3 Select Menu 200 You see a screen like this Men gt Ald Entry Auld Group Print Contacts Note You can print your list of contacts and groups if necessary 4 Select Add Entry You see a screen like this Select a ype Sean to Email Scan to Network Folder
409. you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall Epson Scan try reinstalling it Note With OS X in addition to scanning with Image Capture you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for enhancing scanned images and provides an interface for TWAIN compliant OCR scanning software To download Epson Scan visit Epson s driver download site U S downloads or Canadian downloads Parent topic Solving Scanning Problems Related tasks Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Windows Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Check these sections if a scanned image on your computer screen has a quality problem Image Consists of a Few Dots Only Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images 396 Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked Image is Distorted or Blurry Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges Image is Too Dark Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors Scan Area is Not Adjustable in Thumbnail Preview Scanned Image Edges are Cropped Parent topic Solving Problems Image Consists of a Few Dots Only If your scanned image consists only of a few dots try these solutions e Make sure you placed your original for scanning facing the correct way e If you a

Epson WF-8590 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents